The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutBID - 9913 INSTALLATION OF UTILITY SERVICE CENTER GENERATOR BID INFORMATION AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR INSTALLATION OF THE UTILITIES SERVICE CENTER GENERATOR BID NO. 9913 November 28, 2023 Financial Services Purchasing Division 215 N. Mason St. 2nd Floor PO Box 580 Fort Collins, CO 80522 970.221.6775 970.221.6707 fcgov.com/purchasing 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 1 of 234 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS BID INFORMATION 00020 Invitation to Bid 00050 Scope of Services 00100 General Information 00300 Bid Form 00400 Supplements to Bid Forms 00410 Bid Bond 00420 Statements of Bidders Qualifications 00430 Schedule of Subcontractors CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 00500 Agreement Forms 00510 Notice of Award 00520 Agreement 00530 Notice to Proceed 00600 Bonds and Certificates 00610 Performance Bond 00615 Payment Bond 00630 Certificate of Insurance 00635 Certificate of Substantial Completion 00640 Certificate of Final Acceptance 00650 Lien Waiver Release (CONTRACTOR) 00660 Consent of Surety 00670 Application for Exemption Certificate CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 00700 General Conditions Exhibit GC-A GC-A1 - GC-A2 00800 Supplementary Conditions 00900 Addenda, Modifications, and Payment 00950 Contract Change Order 00960 Application for Payment ADDITIONAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Construction Documents (Technical Specs & Drawings) Generator Specs & Drawings 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 2 of 234 SECTION 00020 INVITATION TO BID 9913 INSTALLATION OF UTILITY SERVICE CENTER GENERATOR BID DUE: 3:00 PM MT (MT our clock), December 21, 2023 As part of the City’s commitment to sustainability, sealed Bids must be submitted online through the Rocky Mountain E-Purchasing System (RMEPS) at http://bidnetdirect.com/colorado/city-of-fort-collins. Public Bid Opening: The bid opening will be conducted by video conference per the following information. At said place and time, and promptly thereafter, all Bids that have been duly received will be publicly opened and read aloud. To access the public Bid opening, please follow the link to join the Zoom meeting: Join Zoom Meeting https://us02web.zoom.us/j/84220043041?pwd=ODg4cWNzQ0UwQVlBRVY5dEU3YVBuZz09 Meeting ID: 842 2004 3041 Passcode: 881062 One tap mobile +17193594580,,84220043041#,,,,*881062# US +16699009128,,84220043041#,,,,*881062# US (San Jose) Dial by your location • +1 719 359 4580 US • +1 669 900 9128 US (San Jose) • +1 253 205 0468 US A pre-bid conference and job walk with representatives of prospective Bidders will be held at 9:00 AM MT on December 5, 2023, at 700 Wood St., Fort Collins. Please enter the main door in the circle drive. Prospective Bidders are invited to present their questions relative to this Bid proposal at this meeting. All questions should be submitted, in writing via email, to Pat Johnson, CPPB, Senior Buyer at pjohnson@fcgov.com no later than 3:00 PM MT on December 8, 2023. Please format your e-mail to include: Bid 9913 Installation of the Utilities Service Center Generator in the subject line. Questions received after this deadline may not be answered. Responses to all questions submitted before the deadline will be addressed in an addendum and posted on RMEPS. The Contract Documents and Construction Drawings may be examined online at: http://www.bidnetdirect.com/colorado/city-of-fort-collins Bid security in the amount of not less than 5% of the total Bid must accompany each Bid in the form specified in the Instructions to Bidders. The successful Bidder will be required to furnish a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond guaranteeing faithful performance and the payment of all bills and obligations arising from the performance of the Contract. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 3 of 234 No Bid may be withdrawn within a period of ninety (90) days after the date fixed for opening Bids. The OWNER reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any informalities and irregularities therein. Prohibition of Unlawful Discrimination: The City, in accordance with the provisions of Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 (78 Stat. 252, 42 US.C. §§ 2000d to 2000d-4) and the Regulations, affirmatively ensures that for all contracts entered into with the City, disadvantaged business enterprises are afforded a full and fair opportunity to bid on the contract and are not to be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in consideration for an award. The City strictly prohibits unlawful discrimination based on an individual’s gender (regardless of gender identity or gender expression), race, color, religion, creed, national origin, ancestry, age 40 years or older, marital status, disability, sexual orientation, genetic information, or other characteristics protected by law. For the purpose of this policy “sexual orientation” means a person’s actual or perceived orientation toward heterosexuality, homosexuality, and bisexuality. The City also strictly prohibits unlawful harassment in the workplace, including sexual harassment. Further, the City strictly prohibits unlawful retaliation against a person who engages in protected activity. Protected activity includes an employee complaining that he or she has been discriminated against in violation of the above policy or participating in an employment discrimination proceeding. The City requires its Contractors to comply with the City’s policy for equal employment opportunity and to prohibit unlawful discrimination, harassment and retaliation. This requirement applies to all third- party Contractors and their subcontractors/subconsultants at every tier. Sales Prohibited/Conflict of Interest: No officer, employee, or member of City Council, shall have a financial interest in the sale to the City of any real or personal property, equipment, material, supplies or services where such officer or employee exercises directly or indirectly any decision-making authority concerning such sale or any supervisory authority over the services to be rendered. This rule also applies to subcontracts with the City. Soliciting or accepting any gift, gratuity favor, entertainment, kickback or any items of monetary value from any person who has or is seeking to do business with the City of Fort Collins is prohibited. Contractor Registration: The City requires new Contractors receiving awards from the City to submit IRS form W-9 and requires all Contractors to accept Direct Deposit (Electronic) payment. If needed, the W-9 form and the Vendor Direct Deposit Authorization Form can be found on the City’s Purchasing website at www.fcgov.com /purchasing under Vendor Reference Documents. Please do not submit these documents with your proposal, however, if you take exception to participating in Direct Deposit (Electronic) payments please clearly note such in your proposal as an exception. The City may waive the requirement to participate in Direct Deposit (Electronic) payments at its sole discretion. Colorado Open Records Act: The City is a governmental entity subject to the Colorado Open Records Act, C.R.S. §§ 24-72-200.1 et seq. (“CORA”). Any bid submitted hereunder is subject to public disclosure by the City pursuant to CORA and City ordinances. All submitted bids, Bid Forms, and the awarded contract will be considered public records subject to disclosure under CORA. By responding to this Bid, Contractor hereby waives any and all claims for damages against the City for the City’s good faith compliance with CORA. Collusive or Sham Bid: Any bid deemed to be collusive or a sham bid will be rejected and reported to authorities as such. Your authorized signature of this proposal assures that such proposal is genuine and is not a collusive or sham proposal. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 4 of 234 City of Fort Collins Gerry Paul Purchasing Director 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 5 of 234 SECTION 00050 SCOPE OF SERVICES PROJECT OVERVIEW The overall project includes the removal of existing generator, installation of new concrete base, setting, new gas line, installation of electrical conduits & cabling, along with connection of one generator and automatic transfer switch (ATS) to the Utilities Service Center. The generator and ATS have been procured by the City of Fort Collins and will be delivered to the site, at 700 Wood St. Fort Collins, CO. The Generator specifications and drawings are attached. The Generator is expected to be shipped in January 2024. The new electrical panel is to be delivered 1st Qtr. 2024. After receipt of permit(s), Contractor will be expected to start work: plumbing, electrical work, removal of old generator and concrete. City will install a temporary generator while the permanent one is out of service. New generator is to be off-loaded and installed by Contractor upon delivery. Installation of the Gen-set electrical panel will be after receipt of the panel, which has been ordered by the City. GENERAL INFORMATION 1. Owner/Engineer have prepared and provided project plans. The permit will be procured by the awarded Contractor. 2. On-site work shall not commence until all required permits have been obtained from the proper authority having jurisdiction. 3. Proper and complete installation shall be reviewed and approved by the Owner/Engineer and will conform to the manufacturer's specifications and checklist. 4. All electrical work shall be performed by a qualified, licensed electrician. 5. All gas piping shall be completed by a qualified, licensed plumbing Contractor. 6. Locating and protecting all public and private subsurface utilities will be done by the Contractor. 7. All concrete pads and surfaces will be the responsibility on the Contractor. However, the Contractor will be responsible for coordinating with the other subcontractors in order to install any grounding system wiring and all of the required electrical conduit prior to the concrete installation. 8. The primary electrical service panel, generator, and ATS will be provided by the City. The Contractor will be responsible for all other electrical equipment and work associated with the Construction Documents. PHASES OF WORK The Prime Contractor is responsible for complete installation of all equipment and systems in accordance with these specifications & drawings; as well as any equipment needed to complete the below referenced work. This Prime Contractor shall subcontract the trade contractors necessary to complete the scope of work. Contractor to revise suggested project phasing as necessary to meet the construction schedule. Adjustments are to be approved by City Project Manager. 1. Phase 1 – Complete installation of gas piping and electrical wiring for new generator and ATS 2. Phase 2 – Coordinate the installation of temporary generator (City provided and installed), remove existing generator, and complete concrete pad work. 3. Phase 3 –Complete installation of new generator and ATS. Contractor to coordinate with City PM and the Utility Service Center staff for the timing of the building shutdowns and termination of electrical gear and equipment per the Construction Documents. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 6 of 234 4. Phase 4 –Perform functional testing of all equipment and train Owner employees on all systems. ELECTRICAL 1. General Notes: All equipment shall be designed and rated for the area in which it is installed. All equipment and construction shall meet the following standards and requirements. a. Currently adopted National Electrical Code. b. National Fire Protection Association Code. c. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to meet all required standards. d. Contractor to check actual equipment used for project is installed per manufacture's requirements. e. NEC Arc Flash Labeling applies. 2. Conduit: Conduit used for this project shall be installed as per design documents. All underground conduits shall be PVC with the last 5ft and transitions from underground elbows being PVC coated GRC. All above grade conduit shall be GRC. a. Rigid steel conduit (GRC) and fittings i. Hot dipped galvanized with interior surface coated with baked enamel. ii. Or fittings shall be threaded type with material to match conduit. b. Liquid Tight Flexible Conduit and Fittings i. Flexible metal conduit with a PVC jacket. ii. Fittings shall be steel compression type watertight. c. PVC Plastic Conduit and Fittings i. Heavy wall polyvinyl chloride, Schedule 40. ii. Fittings shall be solvent weld type of same material and manufacturer as the conduit. d. Conduit Supports i. Conduit clamps, straps and supports shall be steel or malleable iron with galvanized coating. e. Use of drive straps in wood or plumber's perforated straps is prohibited. 3. Conductors: a. The cable shall be suitable for the intended application and shall be manufactured consistent with the best commercial practice. b. Cable to be buried underground to be stranded copper type THHN/THWN-2 75C. c. Instrumentation cable shall be single or multiple stranded copper pairs individually shielded with drain wire and overall shielding. d. Control cable shall be multiple pair THWN-2 with an overall insulated jacket. e. All cables are to meet manufacturer recommendations for equipment being installed. f. All line voltage wire to be 600v rated. 4. Emergency Disconnect Switches: a. Emergency disconnect switches shall be installed not less than 20ft nor more than 100ft from all offloading/loading positions. (See locations on drawings) b. Switches shall be heavy duty and clearly identified for their designated purpose. c. Each circuit leading to or through a dispenser shall be routed through a circuit disconnect that shall simultaneously disconnect all conductors of the supply circuits, including the neutral connector. 5. Panel & Breaker: a. Panel(s) to be as indicated on drawings will be supplied by the Owner for Contractor installation. 6. Grounding & Bonding: a. To be per NEC Article 250 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 7 of 234 b. Ground ring to be min 2/0 AWG bare copper ground conductor and tie to Panelboard & concrete rebar. c. Two ground rods to be 3/4" x 10' copper or copper clad ground rod driven with top 12" below grade. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1. Contractor shall include temporary construction fence at the Utility Service Center. 2. Normal working hours are to be Monday - Friday, 7am – 5pm. Contractor must include weekend/overtime hours for installation of equipment when building power needs to be shut down. All other working hours must be approved by City Project Manager. 3. All temporary power for any building systems that need to continue running during a building power shut down is the responsibility of the Owner. All other temporary power is the responsibility of the Contractor. A temporary backup generator will be provided by the Owner for the Contractor to install when the existing generator is removed until the new generator is completely installed, and final work is accepted. 4. Contractor to ensure a clean and safe work site at all times. 5. Contractor is obligated to observe applicable OSHA regulations including but not limited to posting Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS’s). 6. Contractor is obligated to provide a site-specific, written safety plan and ensure enforcement throughout the life of the project. 7. The Contractor must conform with the following compliance standards: a. ‘City of Fort Collins – Building Design and Construction Standards’ unless specifically exempted from compliance by the City’s appointed Project Manager. Manual is available at https://www.fcgov.com/opserv/design-standards.php. b. The Contractor must conform with the ‘City of Fort Collins Dust Prevention and Dust Control Manual’. Manual is available at https://www.fcgov.com/airquality/pdf/dust- prevention-and-control-manual.pdf c. All final construction work must be ADA compliant. d. The Contractor must conform with the City of Fort Collins Quality Assurance / Quality Control (QA/QC) Program. Program information is available at https://www.fcgov.com/opserv/pdf/dsgnstnds/qa-qc-plan.pdf e. The Contractor is responsible for recording and submitting all applicable information on the ‘City of Fort Collins Waste Management Plan Form’. The Plan form is available at https://www.fcgov.com/recycling/files/construction-waste-management-plan.pdf, and included as Attachment 2 – Waste Tracking Forms. i. The City of Fort Collins reserves the right to withhold Final Payment until a completed ‘City of Fort Collins Waste Management Plan Form’ is submitted. 8. Unless otherwise instructed by the City of Fort Collins Project Manager, a Pre-Construction meeting will occur in which the following topics will be discussed: special facility conditions, hours of operation, access to facility, security, waste container location(s) and other topics deemed necessary to the scope of work. 9. Special working conditions and restrictions may apply to the work area. The City of Fort Collins reserves the right to orchestrate work in cooperation with the Contractor to minimize impact to normal facility operations. 10. Contractor to reference ‘Project Time Extensions for Abnormal Weather Conditions’ in order to determine if time extension will be granted by the City of Fort Collins as found Section 00800 Supplementary Conditions in the Sample Agreement. 11. The City of Fort Collins will perform QA/QC inspections. 12. Communication Protocol: Contractors will comply with the communication protocol as established in a Pre-Construction Meeting. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 8 of 234 13. Project Permits: Contractors shall obtain construction inspection cards prior to beginning any work and shall post in an obvious and convenient location at the project site. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to schedule and pay for all required inspections, special inspections and/or testing. Contractors are responsible for obtaining necessary signatures on the permit cards from the inspectors, including sign off. Upon completion of inspections, Contactors are required to turn in all inspection cards (fully signed) to the City Project Manager. Final payment will be withheld until all inspection cards have been signed and turned into the Project Manager. Any approved change order that significantly revises the scope of work will be available for review by the Project Manager. The Contractor shall correct deficiencies and call for inspection. If a conflict is found within the contract documents and/or City requirements, Contractor shall generate project correspondence to aid the team in resolving a failed inspection. 14. Building Restricted Access Requirements: Contractors shall not begin the project without first reviewing site access and limitations with the City Project Manager. Coordination is required of all labor force and subcontractors to determine work hours within the facility to avoid disruption of services, events and operations. Contractors are to be informed of the facility restrictions such as noise, dust and access prior to beginning work. 15. Badges: If badges are needed for Contractor access, they will be arranged through the City Project Manager. Contractors must provide at least 72-hour notice of need for badges. The Contractor is responsible for coordinating access to the work for subcontractors. All keys must be returned prior to authorization of final payment. Contractors must sign/check-in daily at the facility office prior to starting any work. 16. Contact List: Contractors shall provide a 24-hour emergency contact list to the City Project Manager. 17. Staging & Parking: Staging, parking and traffic control is to be coordinated with the City Project Manager. Contractor shall park all vehicles in designated areas outlined by the City Project Manager, with attention to preclude interference with City operations, activities, including snow removal. 18. Deliveries: All deliveries, including subcontractors’ and material deliveries, shall be coordinated by the Contractor. In no case will City personnel be expected to receive or coordinate deliveries for the project. 19. Dumpsters: Contractors are responsible for disposal of all refuse from the project. In no case, will the Contractor be authorized to deposit construction debris or discard materials of any kind in a City dumpster. 20. Cleanup: Contractors will provide daily cleanup at the project location. Contractor will provide necessary protection within the building against dust and dirt. The Contractor shall provide necessary protection within the project site against damage to finished work, tools and materials. 21. Schedule: Contractors shall provide a schedule of work for distribution prior to construction start. The schedule shall be kept up-to-date by the Contractor and provided to the City Project Manager at meetings for distribution to client, staff and community. 22. Meetings: The Contractor will record all minutes from meetings and be responsible for distribution to the team. Separate meetings shall be held prior to beginning work for any major work that involves critical sequencing or major coordination. 23. Document Conflicts: If building code conflicts are encountered in the course of the work, they shall be documented at the time of discovery and forwarded to the City Project Manager for review. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 9 of 234 SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1.0 DEFINED TERMS Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders which are defined in the Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract (No. 1910-8, 1990 ed.) have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. The term "Bidder" means one who submits a Bid to OWNER, as distinct from a sub-bidder, who submits a Bid to Bidder. The terms "Successful Bidder" means the lowest, qualified, responsible and responsive Bidder to whom OWNER (on basis of OWNER's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award. The term "Bidding Documents" includes the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Form, and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). 2.0 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 2.1. Complete sets of Bidding Documents may be obtained as stated in the Invitation to Bid. No partial sets will be issued. The Bidding Documents may be examined at the locations identified in the Invitation to Bid. 2.2. Complete sets of Bidding Documents shall be used in preparing Bids; neither OWNER nor ENGINEER assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. 2.3. The submitted Bid proposal shall include Sections 00300 and 00400, fully executed. 2.4. OWNER and ENGINEER, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and do not confer a license or grant for any other use. 3.0 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 3.1 To demonstrate qualifications to perform the Work, each Bidder must submit at the time of the Bid opening, a written statement of qualifications provided in Section 00420. As applicable, Bidder must possess all required state and local licenses. 3.2. In accordance with Section 8-160 of the Code of the City of Fort Collins in determining whether a bidder is responsible, the following shall be considered: (1) The ability, capacity and skill of the bidder to perform the contract or provide the services required, (2) whether the bidder can perform the contract or provide the service promptly and within the time specified without delay or interference, (3) the character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience and efficiency of the bidder, (4) the quality of the bidder's performance of previous contracts or services, (5) the previous and existing compliance by the bidder with laws and ordinances relating to the contract or service, (6) the sufficiency of the financial resources and ability of the bidder to perform the contract or provide the service, (7) the quality, availability and adaptability of the materials and services to the particular use required, (8) the ability of the bidder to provide future maintenance and service for the use of the subject of the contract, and (9) any other circumstances which will affect the bidder's performance of the contract. 3.3. Each Bidder may be required to show that any Work previously performed by the Bidder has no claims pending against such Work. No Bid will be accepted from a Bidder who is engaged on any other Work which would impair their ability to perform or finance this Work. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 10 of 234 3.4 No Bidder shall be in default on the performance of any other contract with the City or in the payment of any taxes, licenses or other monies due to the City. 4.0 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 4.1. It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the site to familiarize itself with local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress or performance of the Work, (c) familiarize itself with federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations that may in any manner affect cost, progress or performance of the Work, (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and (e) notify ENGINEER of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. 4.2. Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for identification of: Subsurface and Physical Conditions SC-4.2. 4.3. The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article 4, that without exception the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents and such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. 5.0 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA. 5.1. All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be submitted in writing to the OWNER. Interpretation or clarifications considered necessary in response to such questions will be issued only by Addenda. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. 5.2. All questions concerning the scope of this project and submittal of bids should be directed to the City of Fort Collins' Purchasing Division. 5.3. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by OWNER or ENGINEER. 5.4. Responses to all questions submitted before the deadline will be addressed in an addendum and posted on the Rocky Mountain E-Purchasing System webpage. 6.0 BID BOND 6.1. Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security in an amount no less than five (5) percent of the Bid. The Bid Bond must be executed by a SURETY meeting the requirements of the General Conditions for surety bonds. If a SURETY does not issue electronic Bid Bonds, a scanned copy of the Bid Bond must be submitted electronically through Rocky Mountain E- Purchasing System at the time of bidding, and the hard copy Bid Bond must be mailed to the Purchasing Department at PO Box 580, Fort Collins CO 80522 and received by OWNER prior to contract execution. 6.2. The Bid Security of the successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Agreement and furnished the required contract security, whereupon Bid Security will be returned. If the successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Agreement and furnish the 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 11 of 234 required contract security within 15 days of the Notice of Award, OWNER may annul the Notice of Award and the Bid Security of that Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid Security of other Bidders whom OWNER believes to have reasonable chance receiving the award may be retained by OWNER until the earlier of the seventh day after the effective date of the Agreement or ninety (90) days after the Bid Opening, whereupon Bid Security furnished by such Bidders will be returned. Bid Security with Bids which are not competitive will be returned. 7.0 CONTRACT TIME The number of days within which, or the date by which the Work is to reach Substantial Completion and also completed and ready for Final Payment (the Contract Times) are set forth in the Agreement. 8.0 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in Section 00520. 9.0 SUBSTITUTE ("OR EQUAL") MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described on the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated on the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item of material or equipment may be furnished or used by CONTRACTOR if acceptable to ENGINEER, application for such acceptance will not be considered by ENGINEER until after the "effective date of the Agreement". The procedure for submittal of any such application by CONTRACTOR and consideration by ENGINEER is set forth in the General Conditions which may be further defined in the Supplementary Conditions. 10.0 SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS 10.1. Each Bidder shall submit at the Bid opening to OWNER a list of principal subcontractors proposed for use in the Work. Refer to Section 00430 contained within the Contract Documents. The Bidder may only utilize the subcontractors stated in Section 00430 except in the event that the OWNER requires a change in accordance with Section 10.2 below. Should the Bidder request a change to the subcontractor list, OWNER approval shall be required. Proposed subcontractor/supplier qualifications and references may be requested to be submitted within 3 business days after bid opening. Subcontractor/supplier responsibility will be determined in accordance with Section 8-160 of the Code of the City of Fort Collins. 10.2. If OWNER or ENGINEER after due investigation has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, either may, before the Notice of Award is given, request the apparent successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Bid price. If the apparent successful Bidder declines to make any substitution, OWNER may award the contract to the next lowest responsive and responsible Bidder that proposes to use acceptable subcontractors. Subcontractors, suppliers, other persons or organization listed and to whom OWNER or ENGINEER does not make written objection prior to the giving of the Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER subject to revocation of such acceptance after the effective date of the Agreement as provided in the General Conditions. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 12 of 234 11.0 BID FORM 11.1. A copy of the Bid Form will be posted at http://www.bidnetdirect.com/colorado/city-of-fort- collins. 11.2. Bid Forms must be complete in ink or typed. All lump sum prices on the form must be stated in words and numerals; in case of conflict, words will take precedence. Unit prices shall govern over extensions of sums. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. In the event that there are unit price items in a bid schedule and the "extended amount" indicated for a unit price of a bid item does not equal the product of the unit price and quantity listed, the unit price shall govern, and the extended amount will be corrected accordingly. If there is more than one bid item in a bid schedule, and the total indicated for the schedule does not agree with the sum of prices of the individual bid items, the prices bid on the individual items shall govern and the total for the schedule will be corrected accordingly. The Contractor will be bound by said corrections. 11.3. Bids by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice- president (or other appropriate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the corporate name. 11.4. Bids by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner, the title must appear under signature and the official address of the partnership must be shown below the signature. 11.5. Bids by joint venture shall be signed by each participant in the joint venture or by an authorized agent of each participant. The full name of each person or company interested in the Bid shall be listed on the Bid Form. 11.6. The Bid shall contain an acknowledgement of receipt of all Addenda (the numbers of which must be filled in on the Bid Form). 11.7. No alterations in Bids, or in the printed forms therefore, by erasures, interpolations, or otherwise will be acceptable unless each such alteration is signed or initialed by the Bidder; if initialed, OWNER may require the Bidder to identify any alteration so initialed. 12.0 BID PRICING Bids must be priced as set forth in the Bid Schedule or Schedules. 13.0 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 13.1. Bids shall be submitted prior to the time and date stated in the Bid Documents or any extension thereof made by addendum, electronically using Rocky Mountain E-Purchasing System at the time and place indicated in the Invitation to Bid and accompanied by the documents identified as required in Sections 00300 & 00400. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will not be accepted. Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids. 13.3. Oral, telephonic, telegraphic, physically mailed or delivered or facsimile Bids are invalid and will not receive consideration. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 13 of 234 13.4. No Bidder may submit more than one Bid. Multiple Bids under different names will not be accepted from one firm or association. 14.0 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 14.1. Bids may be modified or withdrawn at any time prior to the opening of Bids on RMEPS. 14.2. Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the time designated for the receipt of Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. 15.0 BID OPENING Bids will be opened and read aloud publicly as indicated in the Invitation to Bid. A Bid Tally of the amounts of the Base Bids and major alternates (if any) will be made available on RMEPS after the opening of Bids. 16.0 BIDS TO REMAIN OPEN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE All Bids shall remain open for ninety (90) days after the day of the Bid Opening, but OWNER may, in his sole discretion, release any Bid prior to that date. 17.0 AWARD OF CONTRACT 17.1. OWNER reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, to waive any and all informalities not involving price, time or changes in the Work, to negotiate contract terms with the Successful Bidder, and the right to disregard all nonconforming, nonresponsive, unbalanced or conditional Bids. Also, OWNER reserves the right to reject the Bid of any Bidder if OWNER believes that it would not be in the best interest of the Project to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive, or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by OWNER. 17.2. In evaluating Bids, OWNER will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award. 17.3. OWNER may consider the qualification and experience of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations proposed for those portions of the Work as to which the identity of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations is submitted as requested by OWNER. OWNER also may consider the operating costs, maintenance requirements, performance data and guarantees of major items of materials and equipment proposed for incorporation in the Work when such data is required to be submitted prior to the Notice of Award. 17.4. OWNER may conduct such investigations as OWNER deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of the Bidder's proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations to do the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to OWNER's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 17.5. If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder whose evaluation by OWNER indicates to OWNER that the award will be in the best interest of the OWNER. The basis for award shall be as noted in Section 00300. Only one contract will be awarded. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 14 of 234 17.6. If the Contract is to be awarded, OWNER will give the Successful Bidder a Notice of Award within ninety (90) days after the date of the Bid opening, or a mutually agreed upon date. 18.0 PERFORMANCE & PAYMENT BONDS The General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions set forth OWNER's requirements as to Performance and Payment Bonds. When the awarded CONTRACTOR delivers the executed Agreement to the OWNER, it shall be accompanied by the required contract bonds. 19.0 SIGNING OF AGREEMENT When OWNER gives a Notice of Award to the awarded CONTRACTOR it will be accompanied by the Agreement with all other written Contract Documents attached. Within fifteen (15) days thereafter, CONTRACTOR shall sign and deliver the AGREEMENT and attached documents to OWNER with the required Bonds. Within ten (10) days thereafter, OWNER shall deliver the executed AGREEMENT to CONTRACTOR. 20.0 TAXES OWNER is exempt from Colorado State Sales and Use Tax as applicable. Said taxes shall not be included in the Contract Price. 21.0 RETAINAGE Provisions concerning retainage are set forth in the Agreement. 22.0 INSURANCE Manufacturer is responsible for providing the City with insurance as required in the attached Agreement. The shipment of all deliverables hereunder shall be insured for full replacement value. 23.0 FEES, LICENSES, PERMITS The successful Manufacturer shall be responsible for obtaining any necessary licenses, fees or permits without additional expense to the City. All vehicles and equipment shall be properly licensed and insured, carry the appropriate permits and be placarded as required by law. 24.0 LAWS AND REGULATIONS The Manufacturer agrees to comply fully with all applicable local, State of Colorado, and Federal laws and regulations and municipal ordinances to include American Disabilities Act (ADA). In performing the Services required hereunder, the Manufacturer agrees to meet all the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and all applicable rules and regulations (the 'ADA'), which are imposed directly on the Manufacturer, or which would be imposed on the City as a public entity. The Manufacturer agrees to be responsible for knowing all applicable requirements of the ADA and to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the City, its officials, agents and employees from and against any and all claims, actions, suits or proceedings of any kind brought against said parties as a result of any acts or omissions of the Manufacturer or its agents in violation of the ADA. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 15 of 234 25.0 WARRANTY Manufacturer warrants all equipment, materials, labor and other work, provided under this Agreement, except City-furnished materials, equipment and labor, against defects and nonconformances in design, materials and workmanship for a period beginning with delivery and ending twenty-four (24) months from and after final acceptance under the Agreement, regardless whether the same were furnished or performed by Manufacturer or by any of its subcontractors of any tier. Upon receipt of written notice from City of any such defect or nonconformances, the affected item or part thereof shall be redesigned, repaired or replaced by Manufacturer in a manner and at a time acceptable to City. Additional warranty information is in the Technical Specifications. 26.0 FORCE MAJEURE No Party hereto shall be considered in default in the performance of an obligation hereunder to the extent that performance of such obligation is delayed, hindered, or prevented by force majeure. Force majeure shall be any cause beyond the control of the defaulting Party which could not reasonably have been foreseen and guarded against. Force majeure includes, but is not limited to, acts of God, fires, riots, pandemics, incendiarism, interference by civil or military authorities, compliance with regulations or orders of military authorities, and acts of war (declared or undeclared), provided such cause could not have been reasonably foreseen and guarded against by the defaulting Party. Force majeure shall not include increases in labor, commodity, utility, material, supply, fuel, or energy costs, or compliance with regulations or orders of civil authorities. To the extent that the performance is actually prevented, the Manufacturer must provide written notice to the City of such condition within ten (10) days from the onset of such condition. 27.0 STANDARD OF CONDUCT The successful firm shall be responsible for maintaining satisfactory standards of employees' competency, conduct, courtesy, appearance, honesty, and integrity, and shall be responsible for taking such disciplinary action with respect to any employee, as may be necessary. The City may request the successful Service Provider to immediately remove from this assignment any employee the City identifies to be unfit to perform duties due to one or more of the following reasons: 1. Neglect of duty. 2. Disorderly conduct, use of abusive or offensive language, quarreling, intimidation by words or actions or fighting. 3. Theft, vandalism, immoral conduct or any other criminal action. 4. Selling, consuming, possessing, or being under the influence of intoxicants, including alcohol, or illegal substances while on assignment for the City. 5. Acting in an unsafe manner All City owned or operated facilities and their grounds are non-smoking sites. All City parks, trails and natural areas are also non-smoking. Agents and employees of Service Provider(s) working for the City shall present a clean and neat appearance. Prior to performing any work for the City, Service Provider(s) shall require each of their employees to wear ID badges or uniforms identifying: Service Provider by name, the first name of their employee and a photograph of their employee if using an ID badge. Their employee shall wear or attach the ID badge to the outer garments at all times. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 16 of 234 28.0 ACCIDENT REPORTING Any incident/accident resulting in damage to property or causing personal injury within the limits of a work site shall be immediately reported to the appropriate police agency, other required agencies, Project Manager and the City of Fort Collins Risk Management Department. The Service Provider shall immediately contact the Utility Operator/Owner and the City of Fort Collins when damage to an underground facility is identified. If a natural or propane gas line is damaged, the Service Provider must call 911 prior to notifying the Utility Operator. The Service Provider shall not backfill around the underground utility line until the Utility Operator has repaired the damage and has given clearance to backfill. The City of Fort Collins will not pay the Service Provider for labor, vehicles, material, or equipment or any other cost associated with the repair to any at-fault damage. Failure to comply may result in a verbal warning, suspension of the crew, loss of work, and/or termination of the Agreement. 29.0 SAFETY PRACTICES, SAFETY DOCUMENTATION AND TRAINING Service Provider(s) shall comply with all engineering, safety, and operating requirements concerning installation of equipment in, on or around utility facilities; obtaining access facilities; and adhering to operating rules and requirements involving safe contact with utility equipment and water, gas and power lines, and confined spaces. Service Provider(s) shall adopt Utility's minimum safety standards as the baseline requirements. Contractor(s) safety record will be evaluated by the evaluation team as an element of determining whether the Contractor(s) is responsible. Contractor(s) whose safety record is above 1.0 for Experience Modification Rating (EMR) and 5.0 for Total Recordable Incident Rate (TRIR) will be reviewed in depth and may be deemed ineligible to be considered for award at the City’s sole discretion. Contractor(s) shall complete the attached Contractor Safety Form, Section 00440. 30.0 UNSATISFACTORY OPERATIONS Should it be necessary to halt the work because of incorrect or unsatisfactory operations under the terms of the awarded contract or because of failure to follow safety standards applicable hereto, the Service Provider must take immediate steps to remedy the deficiencies. Should repair or correction of any safety defect or deficiency not be immediately undertaken and should the City of Fort Collins be required to protect the site or make the repair or correction, the cost of such work shall be deducted from payment due the Service Provider. 31.0 PURCHASING RESTRICTIONS. Purchasing restrictions: The Bidder's authorized signature of this Bid assures the Bidder's compliance with the City's purchasing restrictions. A copy of the resolutions is available for review in the Purchasing Division or the City Clerk's office. A. Cement Restrictions: City of Fort Collins Resolution 91-121 requires that suppliers and producers of cement or products containing cement to certify that the cement was not made in cement kilns that burn hazardous waste as a fuel. 32.0 BID RESULTS Bid results will be posted at http://www.bidnetdirect.com/colorado/city-of-fort-collins. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 17 of 234 33.0 SCHEDULE The anticipated schedule for this project is as follows: Item Dates Bid Issue Date November 28, 2023 Pre-Bid Meeting 9:00 AM MT, December 5, 2023 Deadline for questions 3:00 PM MT, December 8, 2023 Final Addendum issued December 13, 2023 Bid Due 3:00 PM MT, December 21, 2023 Tentative start date January 15, 2024 END OF SECTION 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 18 of 234 SECTION 00300 BID FORM 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 19 of 234 SECTION 00300 BID FORM PROJECT: 9913 Installation of the Utilities Service Center Generator Contractor Name: Date: 1. In compliance with your Invitation to Bid dated , 20 and subject to all conditions thereof, the undersigned a (Corporation, Limited Liability Company, Partnership, Joint Venture, or Sole Proprietor) authorized to do business in the State of Colorado hereby proposes to furnish and do everything required by the Contract Documents to which this refers for the construction of all items listed on the following Bid Schedule or Bid Schedules. 2. The undersigned Bidder does hereby declare and stipulate that this proposal is made in good faith, without collusion or connection with any other person or persons Bidding for the same Work, and that it is made in pursuance of and subject to all the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents pertaining to the Work to be done, all of which have been examined by the undersigned. 3. Accompanying this Bid is a Bid Bond in the sum of ($ ) in accordance with the Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders. 4. The undersigned Bidder agrees to execute the Agreement and a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond for the amount of the total of this Bid within fifteen (15) calendar days from the date when the written Notice of Award is delivered to the address given on this Bid. The name and address of the corporate SURETY with which the Bidder proposes to furnish the specified Performance and Payment Bonds is as follows: 5. All the various phases of Work enumerated in the Contract Documents with their individual jobs and overhead, whether specifically mentioned, included by implication or appurtenant thereto, are to be performed by the CONTRACTOR under one of the items listed in the Bid Schedule, irrespective of whether it is named in said list. 6. Payment for Work performed will be in accordance with the Bid Schedule(s) subject to change(s) as provided in the Contract Documents. 7. The undersigned Bidder hereby acknowledges receipt of Addenda No. through . 8. COLORADO OPEN RECORDS ACT The undersigned Bidder acknowledges that the City is a governmental entity subject to the Colorado Open Records Act, C.R.S. §§ 24-72-200.1 et seq. (“CORA”). Any bids submitted hereunder is subject to public disclosure by the City pursuant to CORA and City ordinances. All submitted bids, Bid Forms, and the awarded contract will be considered public records subject to disclosure under CORA. By responding to this Bid, Contractor hereby waives any and all claims for damages against the City for the City’s good faith compliance with CORA. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 20 of 234 9. The undersigned Bidder hereby acknowledges the documents listed below are required elements of the Bid and must be submitted with the Bid. The City may reject any incomplete Bids as non-responsive. o Bid Form (this Section 00300) o Electronic Bid Bond (Item 3 above and Section 00410) for five (5) percent of the base Bid amount o Acknowledgement of Bid Addenda (Item 7 above) o Statement of Bidder's Qualifications (Section 00420) o Schedule of Subcontractors (Section 00430) o Safety Form (Section 00400) 10. BID SCHEDULE (Base Bid) At the City’s option the basis of award is the low responsive and responsible Bidder based on the total price for Base Bid or the total price for the Base Bid. 9913 INSTALLATION OF THE UTILITIES SERVICE CENTER GENERATOR BID SCHEDULE Ref. No. ITEM UNIT QTY UNIT COST EXTENDED COST 1 Gas Piping Installation LS 1 2 Electrical Installation LS 1 3 Bollard Installation LS 1 4 Concrete Pad LS 1 5 Demolition LS 1 Total Vendor Name: Total price (in writing): 11. PRICES 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 21 of 234 The foregoing prices shall include but is not limited to all labor, materials, overhead, profit, insurance, etc., for completion of the Work. No greater than seven and one-half percent (7.5%) markup allowed on rental items, materials, or subcontractors. Overhead, profit, insurance, bonds, general & administrative expenses, shall be included in the unit prices. Bidder acknowledges that the OWNER has the right to change items prior to award or during Construction at their sole discretion without affecting the Agreement or prices of any item so long as the deletion or change does not exceed twenty-five percent (25%) of the total Agreement Price. RESPECTFULLY SUBMITTED: Legal Firm Name: Physical Address: Remit to Address: Phone: Name of Authorized Agent of Firm: Signature of Authorized Agent: Primary Contact for Project: Title: Email Address: Phone: Cell Phone: (Seal - if Bid is by corporation) Attest: Address Telephone Email 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 22 of 234 SECTION 00400 SUPPLEMENTS TO BID FORMS 00410 Bid Bond 00420 Statement of Bidder's Qualifications 00430 Schedule of Subcontractors 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 23 of 234 SECTION 00410 BID BOND KNOW ALL PEOPLE BY THESE PRESENTS: that we, the undersigned as PRINCIPAL, and , as SURETY, are hereby held and firmly bound unto the City of Fort Collins, Colorado, as OWNER, in the sum of $ ($ ) for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, successors, and assigns. THE CONDITION of this obligation is such that whereas the PRINCIPAL has submitted to the City of Fort Collins, Colorado the accompanying Bid and hereby made a part hereof to enter into a Construction Agreement for the construction of Fort Collins Project, 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator. NOW THEREFORE, (a) If said Bid shall be rejected, or (b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the PRINCIPAL shall execute the Contract attached hereto (properly completed in accordance with said Bid) and shall furnish a BOND for their faithful performance of said Contract, and for payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all other respects perform the Agreement created by the acceptance of said Bid, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise the same shall remain in force and effect, it being expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the SURETY for any and all claims hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein stated. The SURETY, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said SURETY and its BOND shall be in no way impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the OWNER may accept such Bid; and said SURETY does hereby waive notice of any such extension. SURETY Companies executing bonds must be authorized to transact business in the State of Colorado and be accepted by the OWNER. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 24 of 234 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the PRINCIPAL and the SURETY have hereunto set their hands and seals this day of , 20 , and such of them as are corporations have caused their corporate seals to be hereto affixed and these presents to be signed by their proper officers, the day and year first set forth above. PRINCIPAL SURETY Name: Address: By: By: Title: Title: ATTEST: By: (SEAL) (SEAL) 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 25 of 234 SECTION 00420 STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS All questions must be answered, and the data given must be clear and comprehensive. This statement must be notarized. If necessary, questions may be answered on separate attached sheets. The Bidder may submit any additional information if needed. 1. Name of Bidder:: 2. When was Bidder’s firm organized: 3. If your firm is a corporation, where is the firm incorporated: 4. How many years has the firm been engaged in the contracting business under the present firm or trade name? 5. Provide a list of the contracts on hand: (list these, showing the amount of each contract and the appropriate anticipated dates of completion.) 6. What is the general character of Work performed by your company: 7. Have you or a firm for which you were a principal ever failed to complete any Work awarded to you? If so, where and why? 8. Has the firm ever defaulted on a contract? If so, where and why? 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 26 of 234 9. Is the firm debarred by any government agency? If yes, list agency name. 10. Provide the background and experience of the principal members of your organization, including officers: 11. Credit available: $ 12. Bank Reference: 13. Will you, upon request, provide a detailed financial statement for your Company and furnish any other information that may be required by the OWNER? 14. Is the firm licensed as a General Contractor, if applicable, in the City of Fort Collins? 15. Are any lawsuits pending against you or your firm at this time? If yes, provide detail 16. REFERENCES The undersigned Bidder shall provide three (3) completed or under construction project references of similar scope and price from the past three (3) years. It is the City’s preference that the reference projects use the same Project Manager as the CONTRACTOR is proposing for this project. It is preferred that references are from three separate owners and shall include a brief project description, owner contact information (name, title, email, and phone number), and total contract value. References may be 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 27 of 234 checked by the City and bids that do not include the required and satisfactory references may be deemed non-responsive. The City reserves the right to request additional project references at its sole discretion. Project 1 Name: Brief Description: Contract Value: Client: Contact Name: Title: Phone: Email: Project 2 Name: Brief Description: Contract Value: Client: Contact Name: Title: Phone: Email: Project 3 Name: Brief Description: Contract Value: Client: Contact Name: Title: Phone: Email: 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 28 of 234 17. The undersigned hereby authorizes and requests any person, firm or corporation to furnish any information requested by the OWNER in verification of the recital comprising this Statement of Bidder's Qualifications. By signing below, the Contractor agrees that the answers to the foregoing questions and all statements therein contained are true and correct. Company: By: Printed: Title: State of ____________________ County of ____________________ Signed before me on _______________________, 20____ by __________________________________ (name(s) of individual(s) making statement). ____________________________________ (Notary’s official signature) ____________________________________ (Title of office) ____________________________________ (Commission Expiration) 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 29 of 234 SECTION 00430 SCHEDULE OF SUBCONTRACTORS List all subcontractors and their corresponding Work items when performing over 10% of the total bid. WORK ITEM SUBCONTRACTOR 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 30 of 234 SECTION 00440 CONTRACTOR SAFETY FORM Please complete the following form to provide information about your Company’s safety records and procedures. This information will be included in the evaluation of the submitted proposal. We reserve the right to request additional documentation, at any point, that supports the accuracy of this form. Contractor(s) safety record will be evaluated by the evaluation team as an element of determining whether the Contractor(s) is responsible. Contractor(s) whose safety record is above 1.0 for Experience Modification Rating (EMR) and 5.0 for Total Recordable Incident Rate (TRIR) will be reviewed in depth and may be deemed ineligible to be considered for award at the City’s sole discretion. Section 1. General Information Company Name Number of Employees Full Time: Part Time: Seasonal: Insurance Carrier Self-insured for Workers Compensation? Y ☐ N ☐ Section 2. Health and Safety Professional Information Does your company have a full-time dedicated Safety Officer? Y ☐ N ☐ If yes, provide the following information for the dedicated Safety Officer: Name: Title: Phone Number: Email: If no, provide the following information of the person responsible for safety in your company: Name: Title: Phone Number: Email: Provide the following information for the site safety Point of Contact: Name: Title: Phone Number: Email: 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 31 of 234 Section 3. Health and Safety Program Does your company have a written Company Safety Program? Y ☐ N ☐ Does the written Company Safety Program cover the work activities proposed by your company for this project? Y ☐ N ☐ Does the written Company Safety Program include the following: Health and Safety Training Y ☐ N ☐ Employee/Management Responsibility Y ☐ N ☐ Hazard Recognition and Control Y ☐ N ☐ Incident Reporting and Investigation Y ☐ N ☐ Describe a typical job site safety briefing (time, location, frequency, topics, documentation). How does your company ensure health and safety program compliance throughout the project? Does your company perform written Job Hazard Analysis’s (JHA’s) regularly and document them? Y ☐ N ☐ How often does your company conduct Health and Safety audits or inspections? Does your company have a written corrective action plan for any findings? Y ☐ N ☐ Section 4. Training and Certifications List required safety training ALL employees receive: 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 32 of 234 List specialized safety training employees receive as needed: Does your company maintain records of all safety training and certifications? Y ☐ N ☐ Section 5. Safety Equipment (Engineered Controls) Will your company be performing any Trenching/Excavation and Confined Space Activities? Y ☐ N ☐ If yes, list what protective shoring equipment you will have available for the job site? If entering Permit Required Confined Spaces (PRCS), such as vaults or sewers, what is your procedure for these activities? 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 33 of 234 Section 6. Health and Safety Records List the Company’s Experience Modification Rate (EMR) for the previous 3 years Year: EMR: Year: EMR: Year: EMR: For any EMR greater than 1, provide an explanation for the rating and describe the corrective action taken by the Company. Use additional pages if needed. Provide the number of injuries and illnesses recorded (OSHA 300 log or equivalent) in the previous 3 years: Calendar Year Year: Year: Year: Number of Fatalities Number of OSHA recordable cases Number of OSHA modified duty cases Number of OSHA lost time cases OSHA Total Recordable Incident Rate (TRIR) Number of recordable cases x 200,000 Number of hours worked OSHA DART Rate (Days Away Restricted or Transferred) Number of DART cases x 200,000 Number of hours worked Average number of employees on payroll Have any OSHA citations been issued to your company in the past 3 years? Y ☐ N ☐ If yes, list the citations and for each, provide the type of violation, an explanation for the citation, the penalty issued, and describe the corrective action taken by the Company. Limit your response to projects that have occurred in the Rocky Mountain region. Use additional pages if needed. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 34 of 234 SECTION 00500 AGREEMENT FORMS 00510 Notice of Award 00520 Agreement 00530 Notice to Proceed 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 35 of 234 SECTION 00510 NOTICE OF AWARD DATE: [Date] TO: [Contractor] PROJECT: 9913 Installation of the Utilities Service Center Generator OWNER: CITY OF FORT COLLINS (hereinafter referred to as "the OWNER") CONTRACTOR is hereby notified that your Bid dated [CONTRACTOR'S Bid Date] for the above project has been considered. CONTRACTOR is the apparent successful Bidder and has been awarded an Agreement for Bid 9913 Installation of the Utilities Service Center Generator. The Price of the Agreement is ($ ). One (1) copy of all Contract Documents accompany this Notice of Award. Additional copies of the drawings may be requested from the Project Manager. CONTRACTOR must comply with the following conditions within fifteen (15) days of the date of this Notice of Award, that is by [Date]. 1. CONTRACTOR must deliver to the OWNER a fully executed Agreement complete with authorized signature on the signature page. 2. CONTRACTOR must deliver with the executed Agreement the Contract Security (Bonds) as specified in the Instructions to Bidders. Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle OWNER to consider your Bid abandoned, to annul this Notice of Award and to declare your Bid Security forfeited. City of Fort Collins OWNER By: Gerry Paul Purchasing Director 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 36 of 234 SECTION 00520 AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is dated as of the [Day] day of [Month] in the year of 20[Year] and shall be effective on the date this AGREEMENT is signed by the City. The City of Fort Collins (hereinafter called OWNER) and [Contractor] (hereinafter called CONTRACTOR) OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows: ARTICLE 1. WORK CONTRACTOR shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the whole or only a part is defined as the construction of the Bid 9913 Installation of the Utilities Service Center Generator. ARTICLE 2. CHANGE ORDERS The City, may, at any time during the term and without invalidating the Agreement, make changes to the particular services. Such changes shall be agreed upon in writing by the parties by Change Order, a sample of which is attached hereto as 00950, consisting of one (1) page and incorporated herein by this reference. ARTICLE 3. ENGINEER The Project has been designed by AU Workshop, who is hereinafter called ENGINEER and who will assume all duties and responsibilities and will have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4. CONTRACT TIMES 4.1. The Work shall be Substantially Completed by the CONTRACTOR, as evidenced by the issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, within ten (10) calendar days after the date of the Notice to Proceed. 4.2. The Work must be completed by the CONTRACTOR and ready for Final Payment and Acceptance in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions within ( ) calendar days after Substantial Completion. 4.3. Liquidated Damages. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in paragraphs 4.1 and 4.2 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 37 of 234 They also recognize the delays, expenses and difficulties involved in proving in a legal preceding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as Liquidated Damages for delay (but not as penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER the amounts set forth hereafter. 1) Substantial Completion. One thousand dollars ($1,000) for each calendar day or fraction thereof, during one (1) to thirty (30) days after XX number of calendar days OR the Substantial Completion date established in Section 00530 Notice to Proceed until the work is Substantially Complete; if incomplete after thirty (30) days, the liquidated damages are one thousand, five hundred dollars ($1,500) per calendar day, or fraction thereof, until the work is Substantially Complete. 2) Final Payment and Acceptance: After Substantial Completion, five hundred dollars ($500) for each calendar day or fraction thereof after XX number of calendar days after Substantial Completion until the Work is ready for Final Payment and Acceptance. ARTICLE 5. CONTRACT PRICE 5.1. OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents as follows: ($ ), in accordance with Section 00300, attached and incorporated herein by this reference. ARTICLE 6. PAYMENT PROCEDURES CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions. 6.1. PROGRESS PAYMENTS. OWNER shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR's Application for Payment as recommended by ENGINEER, once each month during construction as provided below. All progress payments will be calculated on the basis of the progress of the Work. I In the case of Unit Price Work, progress payments will be based on the number of units completed and pricing will be in accordance with the Bid Form, Section 00300. 6.1.1. APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT Applications for Payment should be emailed monthly to invoices@fcgov.com with a copy to the Project Manager. The cost of the work completed shall be paid to the Contractor each month following the submittal of a correct invoice completed in accordance with the Application for Payment, Section 00960. Payments will be made using the prices stated in the Work Order. In the event a service is requested that is not stated in the Work Order, 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 38 of 234 the Contractor and the City will negotiate an appropriate unit price for the service prior to the Contractor initiating such work. The City pays invoices on Net 30 terms. 6.1.2. Prior to Substantial Completion, OWNER will be entitled to withhold as contract retainage five percent (5%) of each progress payment, but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine, or OWNER may withhold, in accordance with Article 14.7 of the General Conditions. If, in the sole discretion of OWNER, on recommendation of ENGINEER, OWNER determines that the character and progress of the Work have been satisfactory to OWNER and ENGINEER, OWNER may determine that as long as the character and progress of the Work remain satisfactory to them, there will be no additional retainage on account of Work completed in which case the remaining progress payments prior to Substantial Completion will be in an amount equal to 100% of the Work completed. 95% of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work (but delivered, suitably stored and accompanied by documentation satisfactory to OWNER as provided in Article 14.2 of the General Conditions) may be included in the Application for Payment 00960. 6.1.3. Upon Substantial Completion payment will be made in an amount sufficient, if necessary, to increase total payments to CONTRACTOR to 95% of the Contract Price, less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine or OWNER may withhold in accordance with Article 14.7 of the General Conditions or as provided by law. 6.2. FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE. Upon Final Payment and Acceptance of the Work in accordance with Article 14.13 of the General Conditions, OWNER shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by ENGINEER as provided in said Article 14.13. ARTICLE 7. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement, CONTRACTOR makes the following representations: 7.1 CONTRACTOR has familiarized himself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work, site, locality, local conditions, and all applicable Laws and Regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work. 7.2. CONTRACTOR has studied carefully all reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions which are identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in paragraph 4.2 of the General Conditions. 7.3. CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations, 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 39 of 234 investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies, and subsurface or physical conditions, identified in the Supplementary Conditions, at or contiguous to the site or otherwise may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work as CONTRACTOR considers necessary for the performance or furnishing of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provisions of paragraph 4.2 of the General Conditions; and no additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data are or will be required by CONTRACTOR for such purposes. 7.4. CONTRACTOR has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated on the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site and assumes responsibility for the accurate location of said Underground Facilities. No additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data in respect of said Underground Facilities are or will be required by CONTRACTOR in order to perform and furnish the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provision of Article 4.3 of the General Conditions. 7.5. CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations, investigations, tests, reports and data with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 7.6. CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies that he has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to CONTRACTOR. ARTICLE 8. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 8.1. The Contract Documents which comprise the entire Agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work consist of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. Contract Documents are further defined in Article 1.10 of the General Conditions and other items as stated below, all of which are incorporated herein by this reference. 8.2. Forms for use by CITY and/or CONTRACTOR in performing the Work and related actions in carrying out the terms of this Agreement are deemed Contract Documents and incorporated herein by this reference, and include, but are not limited to, the following: 8.2.1. Section 00300 Bid Form 8.2.2. Section 00420 Statements of Bidders Qualifications 8.2.3. Section 00430 Schedule of Subcontractors 8.2.9. Section 00510 Notice of Award 8.2.10. Section 00520 Agreement 8.2.11. Section 00525 Scope of Work 8.2.12. Section 00530 Notice to Proceed 8.2.13. Section 00610 Performance Bond 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 40 of 234 8.2.14. Section 00615 Payment Bond 8.2.15. Section 00630 Certificate of Insurance 8.2.16. Section 00635 Certificate of Substantial Completion 8.2.17. Section 00640 Certificate of Final Acceptance 8.2.18. Section 00650 Lien Waiver Releases 8.2.19. Section 00660 Consent of SURETY 8.2.20. Section 00700 General Conditions 8.2.21. Section 00800 Supplementary Conditions 8.2.22. Section 00960 Application for Payment 8.3. Specifications, Reports & Drawings, dated 7/8/2022 and 11/15/2023 consisting of sheets numbered as follows: G000 Cover Sheet S Structural S100 General Notes & Details M1 Mechanical Notes, Legend, Key Plan and Drawing Index M2 Mechanical Floor Plan and Details E Electrical E500 Electrical One-Line – New Work E600 Electrical Specifications ARTICLE 9. MISCELLANEOUS 9.1. Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Article I of the General Conditions shall have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. 9.2 No assignment by a party hereto of any rights, obligations or interests in or under the Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the prior written consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifically but not without limitations, moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be assigned without such consent and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment no assignment will release or discharge that assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents. Any such assignment without the required prior written consent of the OWNER, shall be deemed null and void and have no effect. 9.3. OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, promises, and obligations in this Agreement and in the Contract Documents. 9.4 To the extent this Agreement or any provision in it constitutes a multiple fiscal year debt or financial obligation of the OWNER, it shall be subject to annual appropriation by OWNER’S City Council as required in Article V, Section 8(b) of the City Charter, City Code Section 8-186, and Article X, Section 20 of the Colorado Constitution. The OWNER shall have no 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 41 of 234 obligation to continue this Agreement in any fiscal year for which no such supporting appropriation has been made. 9.5 The laws of the State of Colorado shall govern the construction, interpretation, execution, and enforcement of this Agreement. The Parties further agree that Larimer County District Court is the proper venue for all disputes. If the OWNER subsequently agrees in writing that the matter may be heard in federal court, venue will be in Denver District Court. 9.6 All notices provided under this Agreement shall be effective immediately when emailed or three business days from the date of the notice when mailed to the following addresses: Contractor: City: Copy to: Attn: Email Address City of Fort Collins Attn: PO Box 580 Fort Collins, CO 80522 Email Address City of Fort Collins Attn: Purchasing Dept. PO Box 580 Fort Collins, CO 80522 purchasing@fcgov.com OWNER: CITY OF FORT COLLINS CONTRACTOR: [CONTRACTOR] By: By: Kelly DiMartino, City Manager (over $1,000,000) PRINTED By: Gerry Paul, Purchasing Director Title: Date: Date: Attest: (CORPORATE SEAL) Attest: Approved as to Form: 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 42 of 234 SECTION 00530 NOTICE TO PROCEED Original Bid Number & Name: 9913 Installation of the Utilities Service Center Generator Description of Work: To: [CONTRACTOR] This notice is to advise you: That the Contract covering the above described Work has been fully executed by the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER. That the required CONTRACTOR's Performance Bond and Payment Bond have been received by the OWNER. Therefore, as the CONTRACTOR for the above described Work, CONTRACTOR is hereby authorized and directed to proceed with the Work to begin on . The dates for Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance shall be , 20 and , 20 , respectively. Dated this day of , 20 . City of Fort Collins OWNER By: Title: ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF NOTICE Receipt of the above Notice to Proceed is hereby acknowledged this day of , 20__. CONTRACTOR: [CONTRACTOR] By: Title: 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 43 of 234 SECTION 00600 BONDS AND CERTIFICATES 00610 Performance Bond 00615 Payment Bond 00630 Certificate of Insurance 00635 Certificate of Substantial Completion 00640 Certificate of Final Acceptance 00650 Lien Waiver Release (CONTRACTOR) 00660 Consent of SURETY 00670 Application for Exemption Certificate 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 44 of 234 SECTION 00610 PERFORMANCE BOND Bond No. KNOW ALL PEOPLE BY THESE PRESENTS: that (firm) (address) (an Individual), (a Partnership), (a Corporation) (a Limited Liability Company), hereinafter referred to as the "PRINCIPAL" and (Firm) (Address) hereinafter referred to as "the SURETY", are held and firmly bound unto City of Fort Collins, 300 Laporte Ave, Fort Collins, Colorado 80522, a home rule municipality, hereinafter referred to as the "OWNER", in the penal sum of ($ ) in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that whereas the PRINCIPAL entered into a certain Agreement with the OWNER, dated the [Day] day of [Month] in the year of 20[Year], a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the performance of the City of Fort Collins Project, 9913 Installation of the Utilities Service Center Generator. NOW, THEREFORE, if the PRINCIPAL shall well, truly and faithfully perform its duties, all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions and agreements of said Agreement during the original term thereof, and any extensions thereof which may be granted by the OWNER, with or without any notice to the SURETY and during the life of the guaranty period, and if the Principal shall satisfy all claims and demands incurred under such Agreement, and shall fully indemnify and save harmless the OWNER from all cost and damages which it may suffer by reason of failure to do so, and shall reimburse and repay the OWNER all outlay and expense which the OWNER may incur in making good any default then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said SURETY, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work to be performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond; and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work or to the Specifications. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the PRINCIPAL shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the SURETY Company must be authorized to transact business in the State of Colorado and be acceptable to the OWNER. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 45 of 234 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed this _____ day of _____ ____, 20__. IN PRESENCE OF: PRINCIPAL (Title) (Title) (Corporate Seal) (Address) IN PRESENCE OF: Other PARTNERS _____________________________ By: _____________________________ By: IN PRESENCE OF: SURETY _____________________________ By:_____________________________________ _____________________________ (Address) (SURETY Seal) NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Agreement. If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute Bond. Attach to form when submitted: Power of Attorney and Certificate of Authority of Attorney(s)-in-Fact 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 46 of 234 SECTION 00615 PAYMENT BOND Bond No. KNOW ALL PEOPLE BY THESE PRESENTS: that (firm) (address) (an Individual), (a Partnership), (a Corporation) (a Limited Liability Company), hereinafter referred to as the "PRINCIPAL" and (Firm) (Address) hereinafter referred to as "the SURETY", are held and firmly bound unto the City of Fort Collins, 300 Laporte Ave., Fort Collins, Colorado 80522 , a home rule municipality, a home rule municipality, hereinafter referred to as "the OWNER", in the penal sum of ($ ) in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that whereas the PRINCIPAL entered into a certain Agreement with the OWNER, dated the [Day] day of [Month] in the year of 20[Year], a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the performance of the City of Fort Collins Project, 9913 Installation of the Utilities Service Center Generator. NOW, THEREFORE, if the PRINCIPAL shall make payment to all persons, firms, subcontractors, and corporations furnishing materials for or performing labor in the prosecution of the Work provided for in such Agreement and any authorized extension or modification thereof, including but not limited to, all amounts due for materials, lubricants, repairs on machinery, equipment and tools, consumed, rented or used in connection with the construction of such Work, and all insurance premiums on said Work, and for all labor, performed in such Work whether by subcontractor or otherwise, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said SURETY, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work to be performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond; and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work or to the Specifications. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the PRINCIPAL shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the SURETY Company must be authorized to transact business in the State of Colorado and be acceptable to the OWNER. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 47 of 234 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed this day of , 20__. IN PRESENCE OF: PRINCIPAL (Title) (Title) (Corporate Seal) (Address) IN PRESENCE OF: Other PARTNERS _____________________________ By: _____________________________ By: IN PRESENCE OF: SURETY _____________________________ By:_____________________________________ _____________________________ (Address) (SURETY Seal) NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Agreement. If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute Bond. Attach to form when submitted: Power of Attorney and Certificate of Authority of Attorney(s)-in-Fact 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 48 of 234 SECTION 00630 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE The CONTRACTOR will provide, from insurance companies acceptable to the City, the insurance coverage designated hereinafter and pay all costs. Before commencing work under this bid, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish the City with certificates of insurance showing the type, amount, class of operations covered, effective dates and date of expiration of policies. In case of the breach of any provision of the Insurance Requirements, the City, at its option, may take out and maintain, at the expense of the Contractor, such insurance as the City may deem proper and may deduct the cost of such insurance from any monies which may be due or become due the CONTRACTOR under this Agreement. Insurance certificates should show the certificate holder as follows: City of Fort Collins Purchasing Division PO Box 580 Fort Collins, CO 80522 The City, its officers, agents and employees shall be named as additional insureds on the Service Provider 's general liability and automobile liability insurance policies by marking the appropriate box or adding a statement to this effect on the certificate, for any claims arising out of work performed under this Agreement. Insurance coverages shall be as follows: A. Workers' Compensation & Employer's Liability. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain during the life of this Agreement for all of the CONTRACTOR’s employees engaged in work performed under this agreement. Workers' Compensation & Employer’s Liability insurance shall conform with statutory limits of $100,000 per accident, $500,000 disease aggregate, and $100,000 disease each employee, or as required by Colorado law. B. General Liability. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain during the life of this Agreement such General Liability as will provide coverage for damage claims of personal injury, including accidental death, as well as for claims for property damage, which may arise directly or indirectly from the performance of work under this Agreement. Coverage for property damage shall be on a "broad form" basis. The amount of insurance for General Liability, shall not be less than $1,000,000 combined single limits for bodily injury and property damage. C. Automobile Liability. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain during the life of this Agreement such Automobile Liability insurance as will provide coverage for damage claims of personal injury, including accidental death, as well as for claims for property damage, which may arise directly or indirectly from the performance of work under this Agreement. Coverage for property damage shall be on a "broad form" basis. The amount of insurance for Automobile Liability, shall not be less than $1,000,000 combined single limits for bodily injury and property damage. D. Builder’s Risk. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain during the term of this Agreement builder’s risk insurance in the amount of full insurable replacement cost. The insurance shall: 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 49 of 234 Be written on a builder’s risk “all risk” policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire; lightning; windstorm; riot; civil commotion; terrorism; vehicle impact; aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief; earthquake and other earth movement; flood; collapse; explosion; debris removal; demolition; and water damage (other than that caused by flood). Cover, as insured property, at least the following: (a) the Work and all materials, supplies, machinery, apparatus, equipment, fixtures, and other property of a similar nature that are to be incorporated into or used in the preparation, fabrication, construction, erection, or completion of the Work, including OWNER-furnished or assigned property; (b) spare parts inventory required within the scope of the Contract; and (c) temporary works which are not intended to form part of the permanent constructed Work but which are intended to provide working access to the Site, or to the Work under construction, or which are intended to provide temporary support for the Work under construction, including scaffolding, form work, fences, shoring, falsework, and temporary structures E. Subcontractors. In the event any work is performed by a subcontractor, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any liability directly or indirectly arising out of the work performed under this Agreement by a subcontractor, which liability is not covered by the subcontractor's insurance. F. Primary Coverage. For any claims related to the Agreement, CONTRACTOR’s insurance shall be primary coverage, and any insurance or self-insurance maintained by the City, its officers, agents and employees shall be in excess of the CONTRACTOR’s insurance and shall not contribute with it. G. Waiver of Subrogation. CONTRACTOR will grant to the City a waiver of any right of subrogation which any insurer of CONTRACTOR may acquire against the City by virtue of any payment of any loss. CONTRACTOR agrees to obtain any endorsement that may be necessary to affect this waiver of subrogation, but this provision applies regardless of whether or not the City has received a waiver of subrogation endorsement from the insurer. In the event any work is performed by a subcontractor, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any liability directly or indirectly arising out of the work performed under this Agreement by a subcontractor, which liability is not covered by the subcontractor's insurance. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 50 of 234 SECTION 00635 CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION TO: CITY OF FORT COLLINS (OWNER) DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: PROJECT TITLE: 9913 Installation of the Utilities Service Center Generator PROJECT OR SPECIFIED PART SHALL LOCATION: Fort Collins, Colorado INCLUDE: OWNER: City of Fort Collins CONTRACTOR: [Contractor] CONTRACT DATE: [Date] The Work performed under this AGREEMENT has been inspected by authorized representatives of the OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and the ENGINEER and the Project or specified part of the Project, as indicated above is hereby declared to have achieved Substantial Completion on the above date. Pursuant to the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR has provided the following items, where applicable: Record Drawings, including Contractor’s redlines (i.e. final as-builts). All approved changes are to be included within the record set. Operations & Maintenance Manuals All applicable training Commissioning Third Party Inspections & Warranties Owner’s Extra Stock & Parts Badges Other: Other: A tentative list of items to be completed or corrected is appended hereto. This list may not be exhaustive, and the failure to include an item on it does not alter the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to complete all the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. OWNER AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE DATE 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 51 of 234 The CONTRACTOR accepts the above Certificate of Substantial Completion and agrees to complete and correct the items on the tentative list on or before the Final Acceptance and Completion date of , 20 . CONTRACTOR AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE DATE The OWNER accepts the Project or specified area of the Project as substantially complete and will assume full possession of the Project or specified area of the Project at 12:01 a.m., on , 20 . CITY OF FORT COLLINS, COLORADO By: OWNER AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE DATE 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 52 of 234 SECTION 00640 CERTIFICATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE AND COMPLETION Month, day , 20 TO: [CONTRACTOR] You are hereby notified that on the day of , 20__, the City of Fort Collins, Colorado, has accepted the Work completed by [CONTRACTOR] for the City of Fort Collins Project, 9913 Installation of the Utilities Service Center Generator. Pursuant to the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR has provided the following items: A. All documentation called for in the Contract Documents; B. Consent of the SURETY, if any, to final payment; C. Satisfactory evidence that all title issues have been resolved such that title to all Work, materials, and equipment has passed to OWNER free and clear of any Liens or other title defects or will so pass upon final payment. D. A list of all disputes that CONTRACTOR believes are unsettled; and E. Complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to OWNER) of all Lien rights arising out of the Work, and of Liens filed in connection with the Work. F. All punch list items are completed or scheduled for corrections of deficiencies. G. Guarantee/Warranty requirements are met. Schedule an eleven (11) month post- construction walk through with the City Project Manager. H. Warranties, reports, records, files and other documents related to construction are in order and turned over to Owner. I. Removal of all Contractor’s temporary work, cleanup and debris removal completed. Your continuing obligations and guarantees for the Project will be as provided in the Contract Documents. OWNER: City of Fort Collins By: Title: 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 53 of 234 SECTION 00650 LIEN WAIVER RELEASE (CONTRACTOR) TO: City of Fort Collins, Colorado (OWNER) FROM: [CONTRACTOR] (CONTRACTOR) PROJECT: 9913 Installation of the Utilities Service Center Generator 1. The CONTRACTOR acknowledges having received payment, except retainage from the OWNER for all work, labor, skill and material furnished, delivered and performed by the CONTRACTOR for the OWNER or for anyone in the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the above described project. 2. In consideration of such payment and other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and adequacy of which are hereby acknowledged, the CONTRACTOR voluntarily waives all rights, claims and liens, including but not limited to, mechanic's liens, Miller Act claims (40 U.S.C.A. 270 a and b), stop notices, equitable liens and labor and material bond rights which the CONTRACTOR may now or may afterward have, claim or assert for all and any work, labor, skill or materials furnished, delivered or performed for the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the above described project, against the OWNER or its officers, agents, employees or assigns, against any fund of or in the possession or control of the OWNER, against the project or against all land and the buildings on and appurtenances to the land improved by the project. 3. The CONTRACTOR affirms that all work, labor and materials, furnished, delivered or performed to or for the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the project were furnished, delivered or performed by the CONTRACTOR or its agents, employees, and servants, or by and through the CONTRACTOR by various subcontractors or materialmen or their agents, employees and servants and further affirms the same have been paid in full and have released in full any and all existing or possible future mechanic's liens or rights or claims against the project or any funds in the OWNER'S possession or control concerning the project or against the OWNER or its officers, agents, employees or assigns arising out of the project. 4. The CONTRACTOR agrees to defend and hold harmless the OWNER, the lender, if any, and the SURETY on the project against and from any claim hereinafter made by the CONTRACTOR'S subcontractors, materialmen, employees, servants, agents or assigns against the project or against the OWNER or its officers, employees, agents or assigns arising out of the project for all loss, damage and costs, including reasonable attorney’s fees, incurred as a result of such claims. 5. The parties acknowledge that the description of the project set forth above constitutes an adequate description of the property and improvements to which this Lien Waiver Release pertains. It is further acknowledged that this Lien Waiver Release is for the benefit of and may be relied upon by the OWNER, the lender, if any, and SURETY on any Payment and Performance Bonds for the project. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 54 of 234 Signed this date , day of month , 20 . CONTRACTOR: [CONTRACTOR] By: Title: ATTEST: Secretary STATE OF ) )ss. COUNTY OF ) Subscribed and sworn to before me this date day of month 20 , by printed name of notary . Witness my hand and official seal. Signed and sworn to [or affirmed] before me on _______________________, 20____ by __________________________________ (name(s) of individual(s) making statement). ____________________________________ (Notary’s official signature) ____________________________________ (Title of office) ____________________________________ (Commission Expiration) 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 55 of 234 SECTION 00660 CONSENT OF SURETY TO: City of Fort Collins, Colorado (hereinafter referred to as the "OWNER") CONTRACTOR: [CONTRACTOR] PROJECT: 9913 Installation of the Utilities Service Center Generator CONTRACT DATE: [Date] In accordance with the provisions of the Contract between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR as indicated above, for . (SURETY) on bond numbers hereby approves of the Final Payment to the CONTRACTOR and agrees that Final Payment to the CONTRACTOR shall not relieve the SURETY of any of its obligations to the OWNER, as set forth in the said SURETY's Bonds. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the SURETY has hereunto set its hand this date day of month , 20 . (SURETY) By: ATTACH: Power of Attorney and Certificate of Authority of Attorney(s)-in-Fact. State of County of ____________________ This record was acknowledged before me on _________________________, 20 _____ by _________________________ as (type of authority, such as officer or trustee) of (name of party/entity on behalf of whom record was executed). (name of officer or agent, title of officer or agent) of (name of corporation acknowledging) a (state or place of incorporation) corporation, on behalf of the corporation. ____________________________________ (Notary’s official signature) ____________________________________ (Title of office) ____________________________________ (Commission Expiration) 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 56 of 234 SECTION 00670 APPLICATION FOR EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 57 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 58 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 59 of 234 SECTION 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 60 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 61 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 62 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 63 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 64 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 65 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 66 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 67 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 68 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 69 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 70 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 71 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 72 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 73 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 74 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 75 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 76 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 77 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 78 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 79 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 80 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 81 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 82 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 83 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 84 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 85 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 86 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 87 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 88 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 89 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 90 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 91 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 92 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 93 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 94 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 95 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 96 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 97 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 98 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 99 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 100 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 101 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 102 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 103 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 104 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 105 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 106 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 107 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 108 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 109 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 110 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 111 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 112 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 113 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 114 of 234 SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 115 of 234 SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Conditions of the Contract These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the General Conditions of the Construction Contract (EJCDC General Conditions 1910-8, 1990 edition with City of Fort Collins modifications) and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. SC-2.8 Preliminary Matters A. Delete paragraph 2.8 of the General Conditions entirely and replace it with the following paragraph: Preconstruction Conference. Within ten days after the Contract Times for a Work Order start to run, but before any Work at the site is started, a conference attended by CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working relationship among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedules referred to in paragraph 2.6, procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other submittals, processing Applications for Payment, and maintaining required records. Unless otherwise agreed by the parties, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for documenting the meeting minutes which shall be subject to the OWNER’S approval. SC-5.4.7 Additional Insureds. Include the following parties or entities as additional insureds, as provided in paragraph 5.4.7 of the General Conditions: 5.4.7.1 City of Fort Collins, PO Box 580, Fort Collins, Colorado 80522 SC-5.4.8 Limits of Liability A. Add the following language at the end of paragraph 5.4.8. The limits of liability for the insurance required by the paragraph numbers of the General Conditions listed in paragraphs 5.4.1 through 5.4.10 of the General Conditions are as outlined in Section 00630 of the Agreement. The limits of liability for the insurance required by paragraphs 5.4.1 through 5.4.6 inclusive and requirements of 5.4.7 through 5.4.10 shall be in accordance with Section 00630 of the Agreement. SC-8.0 Owner’s Responsibilities A. 8.1 Change reference to ENGINEER to PROJECT MANAGER B. Add the following language to ARTICLE 8: 8.10. The OWNER will provide a project manager (the Project Manager). The CONTRACTOR shall direct all questions concerning Contract interpretation, Change Orders, and other requests for clarification or instruction to the Project Manager. 8.10.1 Authority: The Project Manager will be the OWNER's representative during the construction of the project. The Project Manager shall have the authority to reject work and materials whenever such rejection may be necessary to ensure the proper performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 116 of 234 8.10.2 Duties and Responsibilities: The Project Manager will make periodic visits to the project site to observe the progress and quality of the Work and to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Project Manager shall not be required to make comprehensive or continuous inspections to check the progress or quality of the Work. The Project Manager shall not be responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures, or for safety precautions or programs in connection with the Work, or for any failure of the CONTRACTOR to comply with laws and regulation applicable to the performance or furnishing of the Work. Visits and observations made by the Project Manager shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his obligation to conduct comprehensive inspections of the Work, to furnish materials and perform acceptable Work, and to provide adequate safety precautions in conformance with the Contract Documents. The Project Manager shall at all times have access to the Work. The CONTRACTOR shall provide facilities for such access so the Project Manager may perform his or her functions under the Contract Documents. 8.10.3 One or more Construction Inspector(s) (CI) may be assigned to assist the Project Manager in providing observation of the Work, to determine whether or not the Work is proceeding according to the construction documents. CONTRACTOR will receive written notification from the OWNER of any CI assignments. The CI shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The CI will not be responsible for CONTRACTOR's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The CI's dealings in matters pertaining to the on-site work will be to keep the Project Manager properly apprised about such matters. 8.10.4 Communications: All instructions, approvals, and decisions of the Project Manager shall be in writing. The CONTRACTOR may not rely on instructions, approvals, or decisions of the Project Manager until the same are reduced to writing. SC-11.6.2 Change of Contract Price A. Add the following new paragraph to paragraph 11.6.2 of the General Conditions: 11.6.2.7. Cost of the Work. Allowances for profit, overhead and mark-up prescribed by Article 5 of the Agreement shall be used in lieu of any CONTRACTOR'S fee, overhead, profit or mark-up allowances as prescribed in paragraphs 11.6.2.1, 11.6.2.2, and 11.6.2.3. SC-12.3. Project Time Extensions for Abnormal Weather Conditions: Add the following language to the end of paragraph 12.3 of the General Conditions. Lost days due to abnormal weather conditions will be allocated as required. Should there be a day with abnormal weather conditions, Contractor and the City Project Manager will consult, before start of Work, and determine whether Work should begin or not, documenting the decision in writing. In the event the parties mutually agree to suspend Work due to weather, the Project Schedule may be extended on a day for day basis equivalent to the period of time the Work was suspended for weather. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 117 of 234 SC-Confidentiality IN CONNECTION WITH SERVICES provided to the City of Fort Collins (the “City”) pursuant to this Agreement (the “Agreement”), the Service Provider hereby acknowledges that it has been informed that the City has established policies and procedures with regard to the handling of confidential information and other sensitive materials. In consideration of access to certain information, data and material (hereinafter individually and collectively, regardless of nature, referred to as “information”) that are the property of and/or relate to the City or its employees, customers or suppliers, which access is related to the performance of services that the Service Provider has agreed to perform, the Service Provider hereby acknowledges and agrees as follows: That information that has or will come into its possession or knowledge in connection with the performance of services for the City may be confidential and/or proprietary. The Service Provider agrees to treat as confidential (a) all information that is owned by the City, or that relates to the business of the City, or that is used by the City in carrying on business, and (b) all information that is proprietary to a third party (including but not limited to customers and suppliers of the City). The Service Provider shall not disclose any such information to any person not having a legitimate need-to-know for purposes authorized by the City. Further, the Service Provider shall not use such information to obtain any economic or other benefit for itself, or any third party, except as specifically authorized by the City. The foregoing to the contrary notwithstanding, the Service Provider understands that it shall have no obligation under this Agreement with respect to information and material that (a) becomes generally known to the public by publication or some means other than a breach of duty of this Agreement, or (b) is required by law, regulation or court order to be disclosed, provided that the request for such disclosure is proper and the disclosure does not exceed that which is required. In the event of any disclosure under (b) above, the Service Provider shall furnish a copy of this Agreement to anyone to whom it is required to make such disclosure and shall promptly advise the City in writing of each such disclosure. In the event that the Service Provider ceases to perform services for the City, or the City so requests for any reason, the Service Provider shall promptly return to the City any and all information described hereinabove, including all copies, notes and/or summaries (handwritten or mechanically produced) thereof, in its possession or control or as to which it otherwise has access. The Service Provider understands and agrees that the City’s remedies at law for a breach of the Service Provider’s obligations under this Confidentiality Agreement may be inadequate and that the City shall, in the event of any such breach, be entitled to seek equitable relief (including without limitation preliminary and permanent injunctive relief and specific performance) in addition to all other remedies provided hereunder or available at law. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 118 of 234 SECTION 00900 CHANGE ORDERS AND PAYMENT 00950 Contract Change Order 00955 Work Change Directive 00960 Application for Payment 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 119 of 234 SECTION 00950 CHANGE ORDER NO. PROJECT TITLE: 9913 Installation of the Utilities Service Center Generator CONTRACTOR: Company Name PO NUMBER: DESCRIPTION: 1. Reason for Change: Why is the change required? 2. Description of Change: Provide details of the changes to the Work 3. Change in Price: 4. Change in Time: ORIGINAL PRICE $ .00 TOTAL APPROVED CHANGE ORDER .00 TOTAL PENDING CHANGE ORDER .00 TOTAL THIS CHANGE ORDER .00 TOTAL % OF THIS CHANGE ORDER % TOTAL C.O.% OF ORIGINAL WORK ORDER % ADJUSTED COST $ .00 SERVICE PROVIDER: Date: Name, Title ACCEPTANCE: Date: Name, Project Manager REVIEWED: Date: Name, Buyer II or Senior Buyer ACCEPTANCE: Date: Gerry Paul, Purchasing Director (if greater than $60,000) 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 120 of 234 SECTION 00955 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. GENERAL INFORMATION This document was developed for use in situations involving changes in the Work which, if not processed expeditiously, might delay the Project. These changes are often initiated in the field and may affect the Contract Price or the Contract Times. This is not a Change Order, but only a directive to proceed with the Work that may be included in a subsequent Change Order. For supplemental instructions and minor changes not involving a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times a Field Order should be used. B. COMPLETING THE WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE FORM Engineer initiates the form, including a description of the items involved and attachments. Based on conversations between the Engineer/Owner and Contractor, Engineer completes the following: METHOD OF DETERMINING CHANGE, IF ANY, IN CONTRACT PRICE: Mark the method to be used in determining the final cost of Work involved and the estimated net effect on the Contract Price. If the change involves an increase in the Contract Price and the estimated amount is approached before the additional or changed Work is completed, another Work Change Directive must be issued to change the estimated price or Contractor may stop the changed Work when the estimated time is reached. If the Work Change Directive is not likely to change the Contract Price, the space for estimated increase (decrease) should be marked “Not Applicable”. Once Engineer has completed and signed the form, all copies should be sent to Owner for authorization because Engineer alone does not have authority to authorize changes in Price or Times. Once authorized by Owner, a copy should be sent by Engineer to Contractor. Price and Times may only be changed by Change Order signed by Owner and Contractor with Engineer’s recommendation. Article 10 of the General Conditions requires that a Change Order be initiated and processed to cover any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed pursuant to this Work Change Directive. Once the Work covered by this directive is completed or final cost and times are determined, Contractor should submit documentation for inclusion in a Change Order. IF THIS IS A DIRECTIVE TO PROCEED WITH A CHANGE THAT MAY AFFECT THE CONTRACT PRICE OR CONTRACT TIMES. A CHANGE ORDER, IF ANY, SHOULD BE CONSIDERED PROMPTLY. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 121 of 234 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE NO. PROJECT TITLE: 9913 Installation of the Utilities Service Center Generator CONTRACTOR: Name ENGINEER: Name PO NUMBER: You are directed to proceed promptly with the following change(s): Description: Purpose of Work Change Directive: Attachments: (List documents supporting change) If OWNER OR CONTRACTOR believe that the above change has affected Contract Price, any Claim for a Change Order based thereon will involve one or more of the following methods as defined in the Contract Documents. Method of determining change in Contract Price: Unit Prices Lump Sum Cost of the Work Estimated increase (decrease) in Contract Price: $ If the change involves an increase, the estimated amount is not to be exceeded without further authorization. Estimated increase (decrease) in Contract Times: Substantial Completion: days; Ready for Final Acceptance: days REQUESTED: Name CONTRACTOR AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE DATE RECOMMENDED: ENGINEER AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE DATE AUTHORIZED: OWNER AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE DATE 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 122 of 234 Section 00960 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PAGE 1 OF 4 OWNER: City of Fort Collins PROJECT: APPLICATION NUMBER: APPLICATION DATE: PERIOD BEGINNING: ENGINEER: CONTRACTOR: PERIOD ENDING: PROJECT NUMBER: CHANGE ORDERS Application is made for Payment as shown below in connection with Contract NUMBER DATE AMOUNT The present status of the account for this Contract is as follows: 1 2 Original Contract Amount: 3 Net Change by Change Order: Current contract Amount: $0.00 Total Completed and Stored to Date: Less Previous Applications: Amount Due this Application - Before Retainage: $0.00 Less Retainage: Net Change by Change Order $0.00 AMOUNT DUE THIS APPLICATION: $0.00 CERTIFICATION: The undersigned CONTRACTOR certifies that all obligations of CONTRACTOR incurred in connection with the Work have been satisfied as required in Paragraph 14.3. of the General Conditions of the Contract. OR The undersigned CONTRACTOR certifies that to the best of its knowledge, information and belief the Work covered by this Application for Payment has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, that all accounts have been paid for Work for which previous Applications for Payment were issued and payments received, and this current payment requested herein is now due. The above Amount Due This Application is requested by the CONTRACTOR. Date: By: In accordance with the Contract Documents, based on site observations and the data comprising the above Application, the ENGINEER certifies to the OWNER that the Work has progressed to the point indicated; that to the best of its knowledge, information and belief, the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents, and that the CONTRACTOR is entitled to payment of the amount requested herein subject to any set-offs set forth on the attached exhibit. Payment of the above Amount Due This Application is recommended by the ENGINEER. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 123 of 234 Date: By: Payment of the above Amount Due This Application has been reviewed by the OWNER'S Project Manager. Date: By: Payment of the above Amount Due This Application is approved by the OWNER. Date: By: 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 124 of 234 CONTRACT AMOUNTS APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PAGE 2 OF 4 Work Completed Work Completed Work Completed Stored Bid This Month Previous Periods To Date Materials Total Item This Earned Percent Number Description Quantity Units Unit Price Amount Qty. Amount Qty. Amount Qty. Amount Period To Date Billed $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 TOTALS $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 125 of 234 CHANGE ORDERS APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PAGE 3 OF 4 Work Completed Work Completed Work Completed Stored Bid This Month Previous Periods To Date Materials Total Item This Earned Percent Number Description Quantity Units Unit Price Amount Qty. Amount Qty. Amount Qty. Amount Period To Date Billed $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 TOTALS CHANGE ORDERS $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 PROJECT TOTALS $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 126 of 234 STORED MATERIALS SUMMARY PAGE 4 OF 4 On Hand Received Installed On Hand Item Invoice Previous This This This Number Number Description Application Period Period Application $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 TOTALS $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 127 of 234 1. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS. NOTIFY ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY WHEN DISCREPANCIES ARE DISCOVERED. 2. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SUBCONTRACTORS TO REVIEW ALL OF THE DRAWINGS, INCLUDING ARCHITECTURAL FOR WORK UNDER THEIR RESPECTIVE CONTRACTS. ROOF PLANS AND RCP'S DESCRIBE MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK AS DO OTHER ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. NO EXTRAS WILL BE ALLOWED FOR WORK SHOWN IN ANY PART OF THESE DRAWINGS, OR DESCRIBED IN ANY PART OF THE PROJECT MANUAL. 3. ROOM NUMBERS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS ARE FOR CONSTRUCTION REFERENCE ONLY. 'FINAL' ROOM NUMBERS FOR SIGNAGE, ALARM SCHEDULES, PANELS SCHEDULES, ETC. WILL BE ISSUED AT LATER DATE. N S H I E L D S S T W O O D S T CHERRY ST PROJECT SITE 700 WOOD ST ELECTRICAL ENGINEER STRUCTURAL ENGINEER MECHANICAL ENGINEER ARCHITECT [au]workshop, llc 401 Linden Street | Unit 2-221 Fort Collins, CO 80524 Phone: 970-430-5220 JVA Consulting Engineers 213 Linden Street, Suite 200 Fort Collins, CO 80524 Phone: 970-225-9099 Integrated Mechanical, LLC 320 Maple Street, Suite 110 Fort Collins, CO 80521 Phone: 970-556-0570 4645 W. 18th Street, Suite 200 Greeley, CO 80634 Phone: 970-330-3266 GENERAL NOTESPROJECT SITE MAP SHEET INDEX G000 COVER SHEET S STRUCTURAL S100 GENERAL NOTES & DETAILS M MECHANICAL M1 MECHANICAL NOTES, LEGEND, KEY PLAN, AND DRAWING INDEX M2 MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN AND DETAILS E ELECTRICAL ED500 ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE - DEMO WORK E100 ELECTRICAL PLAN E500 ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE - NEW WORK E600 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS workshop ARCHI TECT S+URBANIST S www.auworkshop.co [ ]au PROJECT #: ISSUED: 401 linden street, ste 221 fort collins, co 80524 p:970-430-5220 ©2022 www.auworkshop.co 2104 2022/07/08 CITY OF FORT COLLINS USC GENERATOR UPGRADE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 128 of 234 STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES DESIGN LOADS: 1. DESIGN LOADS: 2018 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE WITH CITY OF FORT COLLINS AMENDMENTS, ASCE 7-10 FOUNDATION DESIGN: FOOTINGS: 1. DESIGN OF FOOTINGS IS BASED ON A. MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE PRESUMED BEARING PRESSURE 2000 PSF 2. BEAR ON THE NATURAL UNDISTURBED SOIL OR COMPACTED STRUCTURAL FILL. REINFORCED CONCRETE: 1. DESIGN IS BASED ON ACI 318 "BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE." 2. CONCRETE WORK SHALL CONFORM TO ACI 301 "STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL CONCRETE." 3. STRUCTURAL CONCRETE SHALL HAVE THE FOLLOWING PROPERTIES: 4. DETAILING, FABRICATION, AND PLACEMENT OF REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ACI 315 "DETAILS AND DETAILING OF CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT." 5. REINFORCING BARS SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A615, GRADE 60. 6. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ON THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS, LAP BARS 50 DIAMETERS (MINIMUM). 7. AT CORNERS AND INTERSECTIONS, MAKE HORIZONTAL BARS CONTINUOUS OR PROVIDE MATCHING CORNER BARS FOR EACH LAYER OF REINFORCEMENT. 8. TRIM OPENINGS IN WALLS AND SLABS WITH (2) #5 FOR EACH LAYER OF REINFORCEMENT, FULLY DEVELOPED BY EXTENSION OR HOOK. 9. EXCEPT AS NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS, CONCRETE PROTECTION FOR REINFORCEMENT IN CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS: A. CAST AGAINST AND PERMANENTLY EXPOSED TO EARTH:3" 1. EXPOSED TO EARTH OR WEATHER: a. #6 THROUGH #18 BARS 2" b. #5 BAR, W31 OR D31 WIRE, AND SMALLER 1-1/2" B. NOT EXPOSED TO WEATHER OR IN CONTACT WITH GROUND: 1. SLABS, WALLS, JOISTS: #11 BARS AND SMALLER 3/4" 2. BEAMS AND COLUMNS: a. PRIMARY REINFORCEMENT 1-1/2" b. STIRRUPS, TIES, SPIRALS 1-1/2" POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS 1. ALL CAST IN PLACE ANCHORS DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ACI 318. 2. POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS SHALL ONLY BE USED WHERE SPECIFIED ON THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN APPROVAL FROM THE ENGINEER-OF-RECORD PRIOR TO INSTALLING POST- INSTALLED ANCHORS IN PLACE OF MISSING OR MISPLACED CAST-IN-PLACE ANCHORS. 3. CARE SHALL BE TAKEN IN PLACING POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS TO AVOID CONFLICTS WITH EXISTING REBAR. EXISTING REINFORCING BARS SHALL NOT BE CUT UNLESS APPROVED BY THE EOR. 4. ALL ANCHORS MUST BE INSTALLED IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER’S PRINTED INSTALLATION INFORMATION (MPII) IN CONJUNCTION WITH EDGE DISTANCE, SPACING, AND EMBEDMENT DEPTH AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. HOLES SHALL BE DRILLED AND CLEANED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MPII. 5. SUBSTITUTION REQUESTS, FOR PRODUCTS OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED, SHALL BE SUBMITTED BY THE CONTRACTOR TO THE ENGINEER-OF-RECORD ALONG WITH CALCULATIONS THAT ARE PREPARED & SEALED BY A REGISTERED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER; REGISTRATION MUST BE IN THE STATE IN WHICH THE PROJECT IS LOCATED. THE CALCULATIONS SHALL DEMONSTRATE THAT THE SUBSTITUTED PRODUCT IS CAPABLE OF ACHIEVING EQUIVALENT PERFORMANCE VALUES (MINIMUM) OF THE SPECIFIED PRODUCT USING THE APPROPRIATE DESIGN PROCEDURE AND/OR STANDARD(S) AS REQUIRED BY THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. 6. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ARRANGE FOR A MANUFACTURER’S FIELD REPRESENTATIVE TO PROVIDE INSTALLATION TRAINING FOR ALL PRODUCTS TO BE USED, PRIOR TO THE ANCHOR INSTALLATION. A RECORD OF TRAINING SHALL BE KEPT ON SITE AND MADE AVAILABLE TO THE EOR/ SPECIAL INSPECTOR AS REQUESTED. 7. ADHESIVE ANCHORS INSTALLED IN HORIZONTAL TO VERTICALLY OVERHEAD ORIENTATION THAT SUPPORT SUSTAINED TENSION LOADS SHALL BE DONE BY A CERTIFIED ANCHOR INSTALLER (AAI) AS CERTIFIED THROUGH ACI/CRSI (ACI 318-11 D 9.2.2, ACI 318-14 17.8.2.2). PROOF OF CURRENT CERTIFICATION SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE EOR FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF INSTALLATION. 8. ADHESIVE ANCHORS MUST BE INSTALLED IN CONCRETE AGED A MINIMUM OF 21 DAYS (ACI 318-11 D 2.2, ACI 318-14 17.1.2) 9. ALL POST INSTALLED ANCHORS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN DRY HOLES THAT HAVE BEEN DRILLED, CLEANED, AND PREPARED IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER’S PRINTED INSTALLATION INFORMATION AND THE RESPECTIVE ICC-ES EVALUATION REPORTS. 10. PROVIDE SPECIAL INSPECTION FOR ALL MECHANICAL AND ADHESIVE ANCHORS PER THE APPLICABLE BUILDING CODE AND PER THE CURRENT ICC-ES REPORT (IBC 2012/2015 TABLE 1705.3 NOTE B). SHOP DRAWINGS: 1. THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS ARE COPYRIGHTED AND SHALL NOT BE COPIED FOR USE AS ERECTION PLANS OR SHOP DETAILS. USE OF JVA'S ELECTRONIC FILES AS THE BASIS FOR SHOP DRAWINGS REQUIRES PRIOR APPROVAL BY JVA, A SIGNED RELEASE OF LIABILITY BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND/OR HIS SUBCONTRACTORS, AND DELETION OF JVA'S NAME AND LOGO FROM ALL SHEETS SO USED. 2. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT IN WRITING ANY REQUESTS TO MODIFY THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS OR PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS. 3. ALL SHOP AND ERECTION DRAWINGS SHALL BE CHECKED AND STAMPED (AFTER HAVING BEEN CHECKED) BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO SUBMISSION FOR STRUCTURAL ENGINEER'S REVIEW; SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS NOT CHECKED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO SUBMISSION TO THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER WILL BE RETURNED WITHOUT REVIEW. 4. FURNISH ELECTRONIC VERSION (PDF) OF SHOP AND ERECTION DRAWINGS TO THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO FABRICATION FOR: A. CONCRETE MIX DESIGNS B. CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL 5. SUBMIT IN A TIMELY MANNER TO PERMIT 10 WORKING DAYS FOR REVIEW BY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. 6. SHOP DRAWINGS SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW DO NOT CONSTITUTE "REQUEST FOR CHANGE IN WRITING" UNLESS SPECIFIC SUGGESTED CHANGES ARE CLEARLY MARKED. IN ANY EVENT, CHANGES MADE BY MEANS OF THE SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL PROCESS BECOME THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ONE INITIATING THE CHANGE. FIELD VERIFICATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS: 1. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL THOROUGHLY INSPECT AND SURVEY THE EXISTING SITE TO VERIFY CONDITIONS THAT MAY AFFECT THE WORK SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. 2. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL REPORT ANY VARIATIONS OR DISCREPANCIES TO THE ARCHITECT AND STRUCTURAL ENGINEER BEFORE PROCEEDING. LETTERS OF CONSTRUCTION COMPLIANCE: 1. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL DETERMINE FROM THE LOCAL BUILDING AUTHORITY, AT THE TIME THE BUILDING PERMIT IS OBTAINED, WHETHER ANY LETTERS OF CONSTRUCTION COMPLIANCE WILL BE REQUESTED FROM THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. 2. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OF ALL SUCH REQUIREMENTS IN WRITING PRIOR TO THE START OF CONSTRUCTION. 3. TWO-DAY ADVANCE NOTICE SHALL BE GIVEN WHEN REQUESTING SITE VISITS NECESSARY AS THE BASIS FOR THE COMPLIANCE LETTER. 4. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE COPIES OF ALL THIRD-PARTY TESTING AND INSPECTION REPORTS TO THE ARCHITECT AND STRUCTURAL ENGINEER A MINIMUM OF ONE WEEK PRIOR TO THE DATE THAT THE COMPLIANCE LETTER IS NEEDED. SPECIAL INSPECTIONS -2015: 1. THE FOLLOWING SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTING SHALL BE PERFORMED BY A QUALIFIED SPECIAL INSPECTOR, RETAINED BY THE OWNER, IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS OF IBC CHAPTER 17: A. SECTION 1704 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS, CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY, AND STRUCTURAL OBSERVATIONS AND THE FOLLOWING SUB-SECTIONS: 1. 1704.2 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTS 2. 1704.3 STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS B. SECTION 1705 REQUIRED VERIFICATION AND INSPECTION AND THE FOLLOWING SUB-SECTIONS: 1. 1705.3 CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION 2. THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL BE A QUALIFIED PERSON WHO SHALL DEMONSTRATE COMPETENCE, TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE BUILDING OFFICIAL, FOR INSPECTION OF THE PARTICULAR TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION OR OPERATION REQUIRING SPECIAL INSPECTION. THE APPROVED INSPECTOR MUST BE INDEPENDENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR THE WORK BEING INSPECTED. 3. DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL BE TO INSPECT AND/OR TEST THE WORK OUTLINED ABOVE AND WITHIN THE STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS IN ACCORDANCE WITH CHAPTER 17 OF THE IBC FOR CONFORMANCE WITH THE APPROVED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. 4. ALL DISCREPANCIES SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE IMMEDIATE ATTENTION OF THE CONTRACTOR FOR CORRECTION. 5. PER SECTION 1704.2.4 THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL FURNISH REGULAR REPORTS TO THE BUILDING OFFICIAL AND THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. PROGRESS REPORTS FOR CONTINUOUS INSPECTION SHALL BE FURNISHED WEEKLY. INDIVIDUAL REPORTS OF PERIODIC INSPECTIONS SHALL BE FURNISHED WITHIN ONE WEEK OF INSPECTION DATES. THE REPORTS SHALL NOTE UNCORRECTED DEFICIENCIES, CORRECTION OF PREVIOUSLY REPORTED DEFICIENCIES, AND CHANGES TO THE APPROVED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AUTHORIZED BY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OF RECORD. 6. THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL SUBMIT A FINAL SIGNED REPORT WITHIN 10 DAYS OF THE FINAL SPECIAL INSPECTION STATING WHETHER THE WORK REQUIRING SPECIAL INSPECTION WAS, TO THE BEST OF THE INSPECTOR'S KNOWLEDGE, IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE APPROVED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND THE APPLICABLE WORKMANSHIP PROVISIONS OF THE IBC. WORK NOT IN COMPLIANCE SHALL BE NOTED IN THE REPORT. 7. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT A WRITTEN STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY TO THE BUILDING OFFICIAL AND THE OWNER PRIOR TO THE COMMENCEMENT OF WORK ON A MAIN WIND-OR SEISMIC-FORCE-RESISTING SYSTEM PER SECTION 1704.4. THE STATEMENT SHALL ACKNOWLEDGE THE AWARENESS OF THE SPECIAL LISTED REQUIREMENTS OF DESIGNATED SEISMIC SYSTEM OR A WIND-OR SEISMIC-RESISTING COMPONENT IN THE STATEMENT OF SPECIAL INSPECTIONS PER SECTION 1705. FIELD VERIFY ± 9' - 0" x 14'-6" (E) COLD JOINT, FIELD VERIFY #3 x ON EACH SIDE OF COLD JOINT @ 32", (ALTERNATE) SEE FOR INSTALLATION. 3" EMBED 4/S100 6" N E W S L A B #3 x AT EACH CORNER AND @ 16" AROUND PERIMETER, ALL SIDES. SEE FOR INSTALLATION. 3" EMBED4/S100 NEW 6" CONCRETE SLAB W/ #4 @ 16" EACH WAY, PLACE AT MID-SLAB DEPTH NOTES: 1.COORDINATE ATTACHMENT OF GENERATOR TO NEW PAD WITH MANUFACTURER. 2.SEE FOR REBAR LAP LENGTHS. 3.SEE FOR TYP ADHESIVE GUIDELINES 4.SEE FOR TYP SCREW ANCHOR GUIDELINES 2/S100 4/S100 5/S100 1' - 4" NEW CUMMINS C200N6 GENERATOR, SEE PLAN TYP 4" 4" 4" 3" NOTES: 1. TOP BARS ARE HORIZONTAL BARS WITH MORE THAN 12 INCHES OF FRESH CONCRETE CAST BELOW BAR 2. TABULATED VALUES ARE BASED ON GRADE 60 NON-EPOXY-COATED REINFORCING BARS AND NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE 3. VALUES ARE IN INCHES ALL GRADES OF STEEL D = FINISHED INSIDE BEND DIAMETER db = NOMINAL BAR DIAMETER MIN D = 6 db FOR #3 THROUGH #8 MIN D = 8 db FOR #9, #10, AND #11 MIN D = 10 db FOR #14 AND #18 db DETAILING DIMENSION HOOK A OR G DETAILING DIMENSION 180° 90° 4db OR 2-1/2" MIN 1 A O R G db D D THRD ROD ANCHOR MIN EMBED UNO 4" 5" 1/2"Ø 3/4"Ø 5/8"Ø 6" 6 1/2" 8 1/4" 9 1/4"3" 3" 3" H HILTI HIT-HY 200 (ICC-ESR 3187) MIN EDGE DISTANCE E MIN SPACING S MIN CONC THICKNESS T ADHESIVE TYPE SIMPSON AT-XP (UES ER-263) ADHESIVE ANCHOR IN 2500 PSI MIN & 21 DAY AGE MIN CONCRETE NOTES: ANCHORS PER PLAN & DETAILS EDGE OF CONC AS OCCURS 1. 2. 3. 4. REBAR #4 #6 #5 7/8"Ø 7"11 1/2"3"#7 1"Ø 8"13"3"#8 INSTALL ADHESIVE ANCHORS PER MANUFACTURER'S INFORMATION AND ICC REPORT. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY MINIMUM EDGE DISTANCES, SPACING AND THICKNESS ARE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SCHEDULE PRIOR TO INSTALLING ANCHOR. HOLES TO BE DRILLED WITH ROTARY DRILL ONLY. WHEN DRILLING HOLES IN EXISTING CONCRETE, USE CARE AND CAUTION TO AVOID CUTTING OR DAMAGING THE EXISTING REINFORCING BARS. MAINTAIN A REASONABLE CLEARANCE BETWEEN REINFORCEMENT AND THE DRILLED-IN ANCHOR. FILL ABANDONED HOLES WITH HIGH STRENGTH GROUT. SPECIAL INSPECTION IS REQUIRED PER IBC SECTION 1705 AND THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE ICC REPORTS. THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR MUST BE ON THE JOB SITE PERIODICALLY DURING ANCHOR INSTALLATION TO VERIFY ANCHOR TYPE, ANCHOR DIMENSIONS, HOLE CLEANLINESS, EMBEDMENT DEPTH, CONCRETE TYPE, CONCRETE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH, DRILL BIT DIAMETER, HOLE DEPTH, EDGE DISTANCE(S), ANCHOR SPACING(S), CONCRETE THICKNESS, AND ADHESIVE INJECTION. 1 3/4"3"3/8"Ø 5"3"#3 PILOT HOLE 1/2"Ø 5/8"Ø 3/4"Ø 7/8"Ø 1"Ø 1 1/8"Ø TOP OF CONC 4" 5" 1/2"Ø 3/4"Ø 5/8"Ø 6" 5 1/4" 6 1/4" 7 1/2"3 3/4" 3 1/8" 2 1/2"#4 #6 #5 7/8"Ø 7"8 3/4"4 3/8"#7 1"Ø 8"10"5"#8 1 3/4"3"3/8"Ø 4 1/4"1 7/8"#3 1/2"Ø 5/8"Ø 3/4"Ø 7/8"Ø 1"Ø 1 1/8"Ø 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 2" 2 1/8" 2 1/4" 2 3/4" E S H T 1 3/4" 1 3/4" ANCHOR AND PILOT HOLE DIA MINIMUM EMBEDMENT 2 1/2" 3 1/4" 5 1/2" 4" 5" 8 3/4"3" 3" 3" H MINIMUM EDGE DIST E MINIMUM SPACING S T (FT-LB) 50 65 150 ANCHOR TYPE SIMPSON TITEN HD (ICC- ESR 2713) SCREW ANCHOR IN 2500 PSI MIN & 21 DAY AGE MIN DRY CONCRETE NOTES: INSTALL SCREW ANCHORS PER MANUFACTURER'S INFORMATION AND ICC REPORT INSTRUCTIONS. SPECIAL INSPECTION IS REQUIRED PER SECTION 1705 OF THE IBC AND THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE ICC REPORTS. INSTALLED ANCHORS SHALL BRING CONNECTED PLIES INTO FIRM CONTACT, MEETING THE INSTALL TORQUE BUT NOT EXCEEDING THE MAXIMUM INSTALL TORQUE. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY MINIMUM EDGE DISTANCES, SPACING AND THICKNESS ARE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SCHEDULE PRIOR TO INSTALLING ANCHOR. HOLES TO BE DRILLED WITH ROTARY DRILL ONLY. WHEN INSTALLING DRILLED-IN ANCHORS IN EXISTING REINFORCED CONCRETE, USE CARE AND CAUTION TO AVOID CUTTING OR DAMAGING THE EXISTING REINFORCING BARS. MAINTAIN A REASONABLE CLEARANCE BETWEEN REINFORCEMENT AND THE DRILLED-IN ANCHOR. FILL ABANDONED HOLES WITH HIGH STRENGTH GROUT. THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR MUST BE ON THE JOBSITE PERIODICALLY DURING ANCHOR INSTALLATION TO VERIFY ANCHOR TYPE, ANCHOR DIMENSIONS, HOLE CLEANLINESS, EMBEDMENT DEPTH, CONCRETE TYPE, CONCRETE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH, DRILL BIT DIAMETER, HOLE DEPTH, EDGE DISTANCE(S), ANCHOR SPACING(S), CONCRETE THICKNESS, AND TIGHTENING TORQUE. MINIMUM CONCRETE THICKNESS 1. 2. 3. 4. MAX INSTALL TORQUE 1 3/4"4"6"3"100 1 3/4" 1 1/2"2 1/2" 3" 4" 4" 4 3/4" 6"4" 3" 3"40 45 115 HILTI KH-EZ (ICC-ESR 3027)1 3/4"3 1/4"5"4"85 1 3/4" 1 3/4" (FT-LB) 10 10 20 INSTALL TORQUE 10 10 20 10 10 ANCHORS PER PLAN & DETAILS EDGE OF CONC AS OCCURS TOP OF CONC 1/2"ø 3/4"ø 5/8"ø 3/8"ø 1/2"ø 3/4"ø 5/8"ø 3/8"ø E S PL HOLE SHALL BE 1/8" LARGER THAN ANCHOR DIA FIELD VERIFY ± 9' - 0" FIELD VERIFY ± 14' - 6" 1 S100 ________ VIF ± 8 1/2" TYP VIF ± 7 1/2" , TYP (E) 5 1/2"Ø STEEL BOLLARD FILLED W/ CONCRETE, 59" ABOVE (E) CONCRETE SLAB TO REMAIN AS IS, TYP OUTLINE OF NEW 6" SLAB OUTLINE OF EXISTING (E) SLAB EDGE OF ASSUMED THICKENED SLAB BELOW, VIF 1' - 4" NEW CUMMINS C200N6 GENERATOR, 159" LONG x 64" WIDE x 85" TALL, MAX 6,091 lb. (86 psf) CENTERED ON NEW SLAB LIMITS. GENERATOR SKID ATTACHMENT TO NEW SLAB PER MANUFACTURER NEW SLAB LIMITS NEW SLAB LIMITS (E) COLD JOINT, FIELD VERIFY 64" 159" - P L O T D A T E A 6 5 4 3 2 6 5 4 3 2 B C D A B C D ISSUE DATE: PROJECT #: T - 970.430.5220 401 LINDEN STREET | UNIT 221 FORT COLLINS, CO, 80524 © 2021 www.auworkshop.co 1 E 1 E JVA #20796 7/7/2022 12:13:19 PM S100 2104 GENERAL NOTES & DETAILS USC GENERATOR FORT COLLINS, CO 80521 CITY OF FORT COLLINS 700 WOOD ST Permit Drawings 2021.07.08 INTENDED USE EXPOSURE CLASS f'c, PSI 28 DAYS MAX W/CM RATIO MAXIMUM AGGREGATE SLUMP, INCHES (+/- 1") AIR CONTENT PERCENT (+/- 1.5%) CEMENT TYPE ADMIXTURES / COMMENTS SLAB ON GRADE CURBS F2-S0-W0-C1 4500 0.45 3/4" STONE 4 6% I/II CONCRETE POST INSTALLED ANCHORS ANCHOR TYPE DEWALT HILTI SIMPSON EXPANSION POWER-STUD+ SD2 (ICC ESR-2502) KWIK BOLT TZ (ICC ESR-1917) STRONG-BOLT 2 (ICC ESR-3037) CONCRETE SCREW SCREW-BOLT+ (ICC ESR 3889) KWIK HUS-EZ (ICC ESR-3027) TITEN HD (ICC ESR 2713) ADHESIVE AC200+ (ICC ESR-4027) HIT-HY 200 (ICC ESR-3187) AT-XP (UES ER-263) MASONRY POST INSTALLED ANCHORS ANCHOR TYPE DEWALT HILTI SIMPSON EXPANSION POWER-STUD+ SD1 (ICC ESR-2966) KWIK BOLT 3 (ICC ESR-1385) WEDGE-ALL (ICC ESR-1396) SCREW SCREW-BOLT+ (ICC ESR-4042) HUS-EZ (ICC ESR-3056)TITEN HD (ICC ESR-1056) ADHESIVE AC100+ GOLD (ICC ESR-3200) HIT HY-70 (ICC ESR-2682) AT-XP (UES ER-281) 0 6"1'2'3' 3/4" 3/4" = 1'-0"S100 SECTION - (E) GENERATOR PAD + NEW SLAB1 3/4" = 1'-0"S100 TYPICAL REBAR LAPS2 3/4" = 1'-0"S100 TYPICAL REBAR BENDS3 TYPICAL CONCRETE REINFORCING LAP & EMBEDMENT LENGTHS (UNO) BAR SIZE TYPE Fc = 3000 PSI (TOP) Fc = 3000 PSI (OTHER) Fc = 4000 PSI (TOP) Fc = 4000 PSI (OTHER) Fc = 5000 PSI (TOP) Fc = 5000 PSI (OTHER) #4 EMBED 29 22 25 19 22 17 LAP 37 29 32 25 29 22 #5 EMBED 36 28 31 24 28 22 LAP 47 36 40 31 36 28 STANDARD HOOKS BAR SIZE D 180° (A OR G) 180° (J) 90° (A OR G) #3 2 1/4" 5" 3" 6" #4 3" 6" 4" 8" #5 3 3/4" 7" 5" 10" 3/4" = 1'-0"S100 TYPICAL ADHESIVE ANCHOR4 3/4" = 1'-0"S100 TYPICAL SCREW ANCHOR5 1/2" = 1'-0" PLAN - (E) GENERATOR PAD 07/08/22 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 129 of 234 Re f r i g e r a t o r R e f r i g e r a t o r D PROJECT SCOPE PLUMBING LEGEND: V LP G VAC CA F GRADE CLEANOUT RD ORD W GW HWC HW TW CW CD PIPE ELBOW UP PIPE TEE DOWN PIPE TEE UP HOT WATER CIRC. TEMPERED WATER PROPANE PIPING NATURAL GAS PIPING PIPE ELBOW DOWN WASTE PIPING VENT PIPING HOT WATER PIPING COLD WATER PIPING PIPE CONTINUATION ROOF DRAIN PIPE OVERFLOW RD PIPE SOLENOID VALVE PIPE CAP UNION CHECK VALVE BALANCE VALVE PRESS. RED. VALVE GATE VALVE GAS COCK BALL VALVE PIPE TO BE REMOVED FLOOR CLEANOUT WALL CLEANOUT ROOF DRAIN VACUUM PIPING COMP AIR PIPING GREASE WASTE PIPING INVERT ELEVATIONI.E. NEW(N) EXISTING(E) X SHT # DETAIL X SHEET # RELOCATE(R)101 REFERENCE DETAIL OR ISOMETRIC FIRE PIPING T & P RELIEF VALVE CONDENSATE PIPING MECHANICAL DRAWING INDEX SHEET NUMBER SHEET NAME MECHANICAL DRAWING INDEX SHEET NUMBER SHEET NAME M1 MECHANICAL NOTES, LEGEND, KEY PLAN, AND DRAWING INDEX M2 MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN AND DETAILS GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS: CODES AND PERMITS WORK SHALL BE PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE STATE AND LOCAL CODES, REGULATIONS AND ORDINANCES. PERMITS NECESSARY FOR PERFORMANCE OF WORK SHALL BE SECURED AND PAID FOR BY THE CONTRACTOR. DRAWINGS AND COORDINATION DRAWINGS FOR MECHANICAL WORK ARE DIAGRAMMATIC IN NATURE, AND ARE NOT INTENDED TO BE SCALED FOR EXACT MEASUREMENTS NOR TO SERVE AS SHOP DRAWINGS. CHANGES FROM THE PLANS MADE WITHOUT CONSENT OF THE ENGINEER SHALL RELIEVE THE ENGINEER OF RESPONSIBILITY FOR ALL CONSEQUENCES ARRIVING OUT OF SUCH CHANGES. INSTALLATION SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. WHERE CONDITIONS REQUIRE REASONABLE CHANGES TO THOSE INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS, MAKE SUCH CHANGES WITHOUT ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. COORDINATE ALL WORK WITH OTHER TRADES. WARRANTY WORKMANSHIP, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND PROPER OPERATION SHALL BE GUARANTEED FOR A PERIOD OF ONE YEAR FROM THE DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE FROM THE OWNER. INITIAL ACCEPTANCE OF WORK SHALL NOT WAIVE THIS GUARANTEE. THIS GUARANTEE SHALL NOT INCLUDE NORMAL MAINTENANCE REQUIRED BY THE OWNER AS DESCRIBED IN EQUIPMENT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS. SUBMITTALS CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT TO THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER A MINIMUM OF (5) COPIES OF SUBMITTAL BROCHURES FOR REVIEW. PROVIDE INFORMATION ON ALL MAJOR EQUIPMENT AS LISTED ON DRAWING EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES, AS WELL AS VALVES, DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAGRAMS AS APPLICABLE. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AT THE COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT (2) COPIES OF COMPLETE OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS TO THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO TURNOVER TO OWNER. MANUALS TO BE BOUND AND INCLUDE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS, REPLACEMENT PARTS LISTS AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION ON ALL EQUIPMENT AS DESCRIBED IN THE SUBMITTALS SECTION. COMPLETED OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ARE TO BE FORWARDED TO THE OWNER WITHIN 90 DAYS AFTER OWNER BUILDING ACCEPTANCE. PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS MANUFACTURER MODEL NUMBERS LISTED ON THE DRAWINGS AND/OR SPECIFICATIONS ARE TO BE CONSIDERED AS THE BASIS OF DESIGN. WHERE TWO OR MORE ALTERNATE MANUFACTURERS OR MATERIALS ARE LISTED, THE CHOICE OF THESE SHALL BE OPTIONAL WITH THE CONTRACTOR. PRIOR TO THE AWARDING OF THE CONTRACT, CONTRACTOR MAY REQUEST A PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS IN WRITING TO THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER NO LATER THAN SEVEN DAYS PRIOR TO THE RECEIPT OF BIDS. THE COST OF ANY CHANGES REQUIRED BY OTHER TRADES, INCLUDING A/E DESIGN, DUE TO THE USE OF EQUIPMENT AND/OR MATERIALS OTHER THAN THAT OF THE BASIS OF DESIGN SHALL BE PAID BY THE CONTRACTOR. RECORD DRAWINGS CONTRACTORS SHALL MAINTAIN A COMPLETE AND ACCURATE SET OF MARKED UP DRAWINGS SHOWING ACTUAL LOCATIONS OF INSTALLED WORK. THESE DRAWINGS ARE TO BE FORWARDED TO THE OWNER AS PART OF THE OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS AT THE COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT. ACCESS DOORS PROVIDE ALL ACCESS DOORS/PANELS AS REQUIRED FOR ACCESS TO VALVES, DAMPERS, CONTROL DEVICES, FILTERS AND ANY OTHER ITEMS FOR WHICH ACCESS IS REQUIRED FOR EITHER OPERATION OR SERVICING. WHERE ACCESS DOORS ARE TO BE INSTALLED IN ASSEMBLIES REQUIRED TO HAVE A SPECIFIC FIRE RATING, ACCESS DOORS SHALL ALSO BE FIRE RATED. PIPING AND DUCTWORK SEALANT THROUGH RATED ASSEMBLIES PENETRATIONS SHALL BE SEALED AS REQUIRED IN ACCORDANCE WITH BUILDING AND MECHANICAL CODES TO RESIST THE PASSAGE OF FLAME AND PRODUCTS OF COMBUSTION IN ORDER TO MAINTAIN THE RESISTANCE RATING OF THE CONSTRUCTION BEING PENETRATED. PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROTECTION OF ALL WORK, MATERALS, AND EQUIPMENT PROVIDED UNDER THIS SECTION. PIPE OPENINGS SHALL BE CLOSED WITH CAPS OR PLUGS TO PREVENT THE ENTRANCE OF DEBRIS DURING CONSTRUCTION. ALL DUCTWORK OPENINGS SHALL BE SEALED CLOSED DURING CONSTRUCTION. EQUIPMENT AND PIPING IDENTIFICATION PROVIDE EQUIPMENT LABELS FOR ALL MAJOR EQUIPMENT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO AIR HANDLING SYSTEMS, FANS, VAV BOXES, CONTROLS, DAMPERS, CONTROL VALVES AND PUMPS. PROVIDE PIPE MARKERS ON CW, HW AND HWC SYSTEMS. LABELS TO BE AT MAXIMUM 8 FEET APART, WITH FLOW DIRECTION INDICATED, AS APPLICABLE. ADDITIONALLY, PROVIDE LABELING ON POTABLE WATER MANIFOLDS INDICATING PLUMBING FIXTURE SERVED BY THE OUTLET, AS APPLICABLE. LABELS SHALL BE AFFIXED OR ADHERED PERMANENTLY TO EQUIPMENT. EQUIPMENT INSTALLED INDOORS TO BE LABELED WITH EMBOSSING TAPE. EQUIPMENT INSTALLED OUTDOORS TO BE LABELED WITH ENGRAVED PLASTIC LAMINATE SIGNS. PIPE MARKERS TO BE SELF-ADHESIVE, MANUFACTURED FOR SUCH PURPOSE. STARTERS AND DISCONNECTS EQUIPMENT STARTERS SHALL BE FURNISHED BY THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR AND INSTALLED BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. EQUIPMENT DISCONNECTS SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS. STARTERS SHALL BE NEMA TYPE, AND SHALL INCLUDE PHASE MONITORING FOR MOTORS 5 HP AND LARGER. TESTING TESTING SHALL BE PERFORMED ON THE FOLLOWING SYSTEMS SPECIFIED. ALL SYSTEMS LISTED MAY NOT BE INCLUDED IN PROJECT, REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR APPLICABLE SYSTEMS. SOIL, WASTE AND STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SHALL BE TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE STATE AND LOCAL CODES. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SHALL BE TESTED AND PROVEN WATERTIGHT UNDER A PRESSURE NOT LESS THAN THE WORKING PRESSURE OF THE SYSTEM FOR A 24 HOUR PERIOD. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM SHALL BE CHLORINATED AND STERILIZED IN ACCORDANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS OF LOCAL JURISDICTION. NATURAL GAS PIPING SHALL BE TESTED WITH AN AIR PRESSURE OF MINIMUM TWO TIMES THE DESIGN SYSTEM PRESSURE, BUT NO LESS THAN 3 PSIG, FOR A PERIOD OF 24 HOURS WITHOUT PRESSURE DROP. BALANCING SYSTEM BALANCING SHALL BE PERFORMED BY A CERTIFIED BALANCING CONTRACTOR. BALANCE ALL SYSTEMS INCLUDING AIRFLOW TO AND FROM ALL OPENINGS, AND PUMPED WATER SYSTEMS INCLUDING DOMESTIC WATER RECIRCULATION SYSTEMS AS APPLICABLE. MAKE ANY ADJUSTMENTS NECESSARY TO RESULT IN CONDITIONS INDICATED AND PROVIDE READJUSTMENTS TO ITEMS IN REPORT AS MAY BE REQUESTED BY ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. SUBMIT TWO COPIES OF TEST AND BALANCE REPORT FOR APPROVAL. FAN AND PUMP SYSTEMS TO BE BALANCED WITHIN PLUS OR MINUS 5 PERCENT OF LISTED VALUES. AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS TO BE BALANCED WITHIN PLUS 10 PERCENT OR MINUS 5 PERCENT OF LISTED VALUES. BALANCE REPORT TO INCLUDE: UNIT IDENTIFICATION MANUFACTURER AND NAMEPLATE DATA EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE AMPERAGE AND ACTUAL AMPERAGE RPM (DESIGN AND ACTUAL) FAN CFM (DESIGN AND ACTUAL) FAN STATIC PRESSURE (DESIGN AND ACTUAL) PUMP GPM (DESIGN AND ACTUAL) PUMP DISCHARGE AND SUCTION PRESSURE REGISTER, GRILLE, DIFFUSER REFERENCE NUMBER AND LOCATION INLET/OUTLET CFM (DESIGN AND ACTUAL) FLOW DEVICE PRESSURE DROP, CFM OR GPM A FINAL BALANCING REPORT SHALL BE PROVIDED TO THE OWNER AFTER COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT. CLEANING AT THE COMPLETION OF WORK, ALL FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT SHALL BE THOROUGHLY CLEANED AND DELIVERED IN A CONDITION SATISFACTORY TO THE ARCHITECT. ALL FILTERS SHALL BE REPLACED WITH NEW PRIOR TO OWNER ACCEPTANCE OF THE BUILDING. 320 Maple St., Suite 110 Fort Collins, CO 80521 Phone: 970-556-0570 front-desk@int-mech.com - P L O T D A T E 5 4 3 2 1 A B C D ISSUE DATE: PROJECT #: T - 970.430.5220 405 LINDEN STREET FORT COLLINS, CO, 80524 © 2020 www.auworkshop.co 11/15/2023 12:04:28 M1 21-039 MECHANICAL NOTES, LEGEND, KEY PLAN, AND DRAWING INDEX USC GENERATOR 700 WOOD ST FORT COLLINS, CO 80521 CITY OF FORT COLLINS PERMIT SET 2022.07.08 0"1"2" 1" = 60'-0" KEY PLAN GENERAL PLUMBING NOTES 1 PLUMBING WORK SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE CODES. VERIFY ALL REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO SUBMITTING BID OR COMMENCING WORK. THE PLUMBING DESIGN IS BASED ON THE 2018 INTERNATIONAL PLUMBING CODE. 2 HANGERS FOR 2" AND SMALLER PIPE SHALL BE BAND TYPE, 2.5" AND LARGER SHALL BE CLEVIS TYPE. USE COPPER COATED TYPE ON COPPER PIPE. 3 GAS PIPE 3" AND SMALLER SHALL BE SCHEDULE 40 BLACK STEEL. FITTINGS SHALL BE MALLEABLE SCREW TYPE. 4 GAS PIPE 4" AND LARGER SHALL BE SCHEDULE 40 BLACK STEEL. FITTINGS SHALL BE FULLY WELDED. 5 INSTALL UNION, GAS COCK AND FULL SIZE 6" LONG DIRT LEG FOR ALL GAS FIRED EQUIPMENT. PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE FIXTURE TAG FIXTURE SPECIFICATIONS PRV-1 GAS PRESSURE REGULATOR - MAXITROL MODEL 210E, 2" INLET AND OUTLET, 2 PSI INLET PRESSURE, 6" W.C. OUTLET PRESSURE, 10,000 CFH MAXIMUM, 100 CFH MINIMUM, CSA US LISTED, ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION. INSTALL BLACK STEEL GOOSENECK AT VENT. PC SHALL VERIFY EXISTING GAS PRESSURE TO MATCH. PRV-2 GAS PRESSURE REGULATOR - MAXITROL 325-7AL, 1.5" INLET AND OUTLET, 1,250 CFH MAXIMUM LARGEST APPLIANCE, 1,250 MAXIMUM TOTAL CAPACITY, 2 PSI INLET PRESSURE, 7" W.C. OUTLET, INSTALL BLACK STEEL GOOSENECK AT VENT. PC SHALL VERIFY EXISTING GAS PRESSURE TO MATCH. PRV-3 GAS PRESSURE REGULATOR - MAXITROL 325-11AL, 2" INLET AND OUTLET, 2 PSI INLET PRESSURE, 10" W.C. OUTLET PRESSURE, 4,500 CFH MAXIMUM CAPACITY, INSTALL BLACK STEEL GOOSENECK AT VENT. TOTAL GAS LOAD 4850 (NEW) GENERATOR 2150 (EXISTING) WATER HEATER 40 (EXISTING) DOAS 100 (EXISTING) DOAS 100 (EXISTING) DOAS 100 (EXISTING) RTU 120 (EXISTING) RTU 120 (EXISTING) UNIT HEATER 120 (EXISTING) UNIT HEATER 120 (EXISTING) UNIT HEATER 120 (EXISTING) UNIT HEATER 120 (EXISTING) UNIT HEATER 120 (EXISTING) UNIT HEATER 120 (EXISTING) UNIT HEATER 120 (EXISTING) UNIT HEATER 120 (EXISTING) UNIT HEATER 120 (EXISTING) UNIT HEATER 120 (EXISTING) UNIT HEATER 120 (EXISTING) BOILER 800 EQUIPMENT MBH NOTE: EXISTING EQUIPMENT WAS DETERMINED BASED ON SITE OBSERVATION. PC SHALL FIELD VERIFY PRIOR TO CONTACTING GAS UTILITY PROVIDER TO CONFIRM VALUES INDICATED. 4,850 MBH ADDITIONAL LOAD/2 PSI DELIVERY/456' T.E.L. GAS METER SCHEDULE STEEL 12 FEET 15 FEET PIPING MATERIAL MAX HORIZ SPACING MAX VERT SPACING PIPE SUPPORT SCHEDULE GREEN CODE REQUIREMENTS CITY OF FORT COLLINS 1 A CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN WILL BE IMPLEMENTED REQUIRING RECYCLING OF NONHAZARDOUS CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS. COORDINATE WITH G.C. FOR RECYCLING OF ITEMS RELATED TO THE MECHANICAL SCOPE OF WORK. MSI-01 -2023.11.15 15 NOV 2023 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 130 of 234 Re f r i g e r a t o r R e f r i g e r a t o r G G G GENERATOR (BY OTHERS) G G 2" 2" 2" PRV-3 GAS METER PRV-1 PRV-2 21 6 5 4 6 3 9 9 EXISTING PROPANE TANK 8 7 2" X 10 X 10 MINIMUM 41" LENGTH MINIMUM 80" LENGTH MINIMUM 80" LENGTH 11 (E)G(E)G(E ) G (E)G 3 EXISTING 6" GAS PIPING SHALL REMAIN AS-IS EXISTING 2" GAS PIPING BRANCH AND SHUT-OFF VALVE ALL GAS PIPE, EXISTING AND NEW, IS ON ROOF IMMEDIATELY UPON AWARD OF CONTRACT, PC SHALL COORDINATE WITH GAS UTILITY PROVIDER TO UPGRADE EXISTING GAS METER FROM 6" W.C. DELIVERY PRESSURE TO 2 PSI DELIVERY PRESSURE. EXISTING MBH USAGE AT THIS METER IS DETERMINED TO BE 2,700 MBH. IMMEDIATELY UPON AWARD OF CONTRACT, PC SHALL CONFIRM EXISTING GAS USAGE FROM THIS METER AND COORDINATE ADDITIONAL 2,150 MBH FOR NEW GENERATOR, 4,850 MBH TOTAL, WITH GAS UTILITY COMPANY. REFER TO GAS METER PIPING DETAIL ON THIS SHEET FOR MORE INFORMATION ON WORK IN THIS AREA. CONNECT NEW GAS FIRED GENERATOR WITH GAS COCK, PRV-3, UNION, AND FULL SIZE 6" DIRT LEG OUTSIDE OF GENERATOR ENCLOSURE. GAS PIPING DOWNSTREAM OF PRV SHALL REMAIN AT 2" UNTIL CONNECTION TO GENERATOR. REFER TO GENERATOR INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR MORE INFORMATION. GAS PIPING SIZED USING THE EQUATIONS IN THE 2021 IFGC, NOT THE TABLES. REFER TO GAS METER LOAD SCHEDULE ON SHEET M1 FOR VARIABLES USED IN CALCULATION. EXISTING 6" GAS PIPING DISTRIBUTION DOWNSTREAM OF PRV-1 AND PRV-2 TO REMAIN IS. BOTH PRVs SHALL BE SET TO 7" W.C. TO MATCH EXISTING GAS PRESSURE, TO BE VERIFIED BY PC. EXISTING PROPANE TANK AND ASSOCIATED PIPING TO REMAIN TO SERVE NEW GENERATOR PROPANE SUPPLY. PROPANE SUPPLIER SHALL CONFIRM EXISTING PIPING IS OF SUFFICIENT SIZE, OR PROVIDE PIPE SIZING SPECIFICATIONS. COORDINATE WITH GC AND PROPANE SUPPLIER. ROUTE GAS PIPE OF SIZE INDICATED DOWN ON EXTERIOR WALL. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH GC. GAS PIPING TO BE ROUTED ON ROOF. FIELD VERIFY EXACT ROUTING REQUIREMENTS ON ROOF. THIS LOCATION SHALL SERVE AS GAS PIPE ANCHOR POINT TO ROOF. PROVIDE THERMAL EXPANSION JOINT AS INDICATED IN THIS LOCATION WITH MINIMUM PIPE LENGTHS AS INDICATED. FLAG NOTES: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 SCALE: GAS PIPE SUPPORT DETAIL NONE NOTE: PROVIDE GAS PIPE SUPPORTS MINIMUM EVERY 8'-0" GAS PIPE PIPE CLAMP COOPER B-LINE DURA-BLOK DB10, 5" HIGH x 6" WIDE x 9.6" LONG, OR APPROVED EQUAL 1" HIGH GALV. CHANNEL SCALE: GAS METER PIPING DETAIL NONE NOTE: THIS DETAIL REPRESENTS APPROXIMATE INSTALLATION SCHEMATICALLY. ALL WORK UPSTREAM OF METER CONNECTION TO METER IS BY OTHERS. COORDINATE SCOPE WITH GC. GAS UTILITY SERVICE PROVIDER SHALL DETERMINE INSTALLATION MANIFOLD DESIGN, SIZES AND REQUIREMENTS. THIS OFFICES' DETAIL IS FOR COORDINATION PURPOSES ONLY. EXISTING 2" GAS RATED BALL VALVE, TYP. PRV-1 PRV-2 1.5" 3" 2" 6" 1.5" 6"CONNECT NEW 6" GAS (7" W.C.) TO EXISTING 6" GAS. 3" CONTINUE NEW 2" GAS (2 PSI) TO NEW GENERATOR AS INDICATED ON FLOOR PLAN G G G (E)G (E)6" GAS TO REMAIN AS IS REGULATOR (BY OTHERS) 2 PSI DELIVERY PRESSURE(E ) G EXISTING GAS SERVICE EXISTING 6" W.C. METER TO BE REPLACED WITH METER SET FOR 2 PSI. (E)G (E)6" 3" (E)6" UPSIZED WITHIN EXISTING CHASE 6" ROOF LEVEL (E)6" FROM METER TO ROOF TO REMAIN AS-IS. UNION, TYP. 320 Maple St., Suite 110 Fort Collins, CO 80521 Phone: 970-556-0570 front-desk@int-mech.com - P L O T D A T E 5 4 3 2 1 A B C D ISSUE DATE: PROJECT #: T - 970.430.5220 405 LINDEN STREET FORT COLLINS, CO, 80524 © 2020 www.auworkshop.co 11/15/2023 12:04:29 M2 21-039 MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN AND DETAILS USC GENERATOR 700 WOOD ST FORT COLLINS, CO 80521 CITY OF FORT COLLINS PERMIT SET 2022.07.08 0"1"2" 1/16" = 1'-0"MECAHNICAL FLOOR PLAN MSI-01 -2023.11.15 15 NOV 2023 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 131 of 234 workshop ARCHI TECT S+URBANIST S www.auworkshop.co [ ]au - P L O T D A T E A 6 5 4 3 2 6 5 4 3 2 B C D A B C D 1 E 1 E issue date: project #: T - 970.430.5220 401 Linden St | Unit 221 Fort Collins, CO, 80524 © 2020 www.auworkshop.co 1912 UT I L I T I E S S E R V I C E CE N T E R R E N O V A T I O N 70 0 W O O D S T R E E T FO R T C O L L I N S , C O 8 0 5 2 1 CI T Y O F F O R T C O L L I N S PERMIT DOCUMENTS 08 JULY 2022 ED500 ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE - DEMO WORK 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 132 of 234 UP UP Re f r i g e r a t o r R e f r i g e r a t o r UP UP UP UP UP A-A A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-5 A-6 A-7 B-1 A-B A-C A-D A-E A-F A-G B-2 B-3 B-4 C-1 C-2 C-3 B-5 B-A B-B B-C B-D B-E B-F B-G C-4 C-5 C-6 C-7 C-8 C-9 C-10 C-A C-B C-C C-D C-E C-F C-G C-H C-I C-J C-K D-1 D-2 D-3 D-4 D-5 D-6 D-7 D-8 D-9 D-A D-B D-C D-D D-E D-F D-G E-1 E-2 E-3 E-4 E-5 E-6 E-7 E-8 E-9 E-10 E-A E-B E-C E-D E-E E-F E-G F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-7 F-8 F-A F-B F-C F-D F-E F-F G-1G-2 G-3 G-4 G-5 G-6 G-7 G-8 G-9 G-10 G-11 G-12 G-13 OFFICE 365 NOC 360 KITCHEN 501 SCO 500 SCO CONF. 503RESTROOM 502A WORK BENCH 363 RESTROOM 502B SERVER ROOM 504 CORR. 400B BROADBAND OFFICE 421 SMALL CONF B 401 BROADBAND / L&P OPEN OFFICE 423 SMALL CONF C 402 OFFICE (WORKSTATIONS) 424 OFFICE 426 JETSON CONF. ROOM 428 ELEC. 435 STORAGE 436 L&P OFFICE 429 L&P LOCATE OFFICE 430 ELEC. 437 READY ROOM 434 TRAINING AND SAFETY 440 UPS 538 COLLAB 506 CONF. ROOM 351 OFFICE 349 OFFICE 347 OFFICE 344 LARGE CONF C 510 LARGE CONF B 509 workshop ARCHI TECT S+URBANIST S www.auworkshop.co [ ]au - P L O T D A T E A 6 5 4 3 2 6 5 4 3 2 B C D A B C D 1 E 1 E issue date: project #: T - 970.430.5220 401 Linden St | Unit 221 Fort Collins, CO, 80524 © 2020 www.auworkshop.co 1912 UT I L I T I E S S E R V I C E CE N T E R R E N O V A T I O N 70 0 W O O D S T R E E T FO R T C O L L I N S , C O 8 0 5 2 1 CI T Y O F F O R T C O L L I N S PERMIT DOCUMENTS 08 JULY 2022 E100 ELECTRICAL PLAN 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 133 of 234 workshop ARCHI TECT S+URBANIST S www.auworkshop.co [ ]au - P L O T D A T E A 6 5 4 3 2 6 5 4 3 2 B C D A B C D 1 E 1 E issue date: project #: T - 970.430.5220 401 Linden St | Unit 221 Fort Collins, CO, 80524 © 2020 www.auworkshop.co 1912 UT I L I T I E S S E R V I C E CE N T E R R E N O V A T I O N 70 0 W O O D S T R E E T FO R T C O L L I N S , C O 8 0 5 2 1 CI T Y O F F O R T C O L L I N S PERMIT DOCUMENTS 08 JULY 2022 E500 ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE - NEW WORK 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 134 of 234 Electrical Specifications SECTION 16010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 CONDITIONS: A. All work under this Section shall be governed by project general conditions, along with all supplements and amendments thereto, as published by Owner. 1.2 CODES AND REGULATIONS: A. Comply with all applicable state and local codes, regulations and ordinances, and the latest applicable requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC) of the NFPA, as interpreted by the local inspection authority that shall have final jurisdiction. B. Comply also with all OSHA requirements and directives. 1.3 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES: A. Examine the premises prior to bidding and become fully familiar with existing conditions. 1.4 PERMITS: A. Secure and pay for all permits, fees, taxes, licenses and inspections in connection with the electrical work. 1.5 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS: A. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general arrangement of electrical work. Locations are approximate and shall be subject to minor modifications as directed by Engineer. B. Contractor shall be responsible for exact fitting of all materials, equipment, etc., in building. All dimensions shall be verified on the job. C. Refer to Architectural, Structural, and Mechanical Drawings and Specifications, as part of this set, and be responsible for all information contained therein as affects the electrical work. D. Instructions such as "provide..." shall mean "Contractor shall be responsible for the furnishing and installing of new..., complete in every respect." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STANDARDS: A. All material shall be new and shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated (UL listed) for the purpose intended and shall bear the UL label. Damaged or defective materials shall be replaced. All materials shall comply with the latest NEMA standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SHOP DRAWINGS: A. Furnish electronic (pdf) sets of Shop Drawings to Architect for the following: 1. Control Equipment. 2. Distribution Equipment. 3. Light Fixtures B. All materials and equipment shall be approved prior to beginning work. C. Receipt within 30 days after award of contract. D. Shop Drawings, including: 1. Catalog data specifically for equipment to be used. 2. See shop drawing requirements in General Provisions. Electrical Contractor shall provide shop drawing approval stamps on all equipment supplied by them prior to Engineer's shop drawing approval. The Electrical Contractor to check for conformance with the design of the project and compliance with the information given in the contract documents. Contractor is responsible for dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site; fabrication process and techniques of construction. 3.2 RECORD DRAWINGS: A. Maintain a complete set of Electrical Drawings at the job site with all changes in the work marked thereon in a contrasting color. B. Electrical Contractor shall provide architect at completion of project a complete set of as-built drawings showing all changes in work marked there on including all system wiring diagrams. 3.3 COORDINATION: A. Order the progress of the work so as to conform to the progress of other trades. Coordinate all electrical installations and rough-ins as required. 3.4 WORKMANSHIP: A. Provide a competent foreman on the job at all times. All work shall be accomplished in a manner which is neat, workmanlike, of first quality, and compatible with good commercial practices and standards. Provide competent workmen who are skilled as electricians. 3.5 INSTALLATION: A. Install all equipment and materials in accordance with information as indicated on drawings and in full accord with Manufacturer's recommendations. 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING: A. Provide all cutting, channeling, chasing, drilling, etc., operations as may be required for electrical work. In general, all such operations shall be held to a minimum. B. All patching and painting shall be done by Contractor. 3.7 CONSTRUCTION POWER AND LIGHTING: A. Provide construction power and lighting for construction as required. Energy costs will be paid by Owner. All temporary facilities shall be properly grounded, shall comply with NEC and OSHA requirements, and shall have ground fault protection. 3.8 SECONDARY SERVICE: A. Power for distribution within the building is available from the secondary side of a pad mount transformer supplied by the local power company. This service is 3 phase, 4 wire, 277/480V, 1600A, 60 Hertz alternating current for normal power and lighting requirements. General arrangement of the service equipment is shown on drawings. Equipment shall be as specified herein. 3.9 REMODEL WORK: A. Electrical Contractor shall remove all wiring devices, light fixtures, etc., which are indicated to be removed. In general, symbols which are dashed indicate existing devices which are to remain. Symbols which are dashed and are crosshatched indicate existing devices which are to be removed. Devices which are to be removed may require reworking conduit and wiring in order to maintain service to other devices. If removed devices are on walls or ceilings which are to remain, blank coverplates are to be installed on outlet boxes. B. Where remodeling interferes with circuits in areas which are otherwise undisturbed, circuits shall be reworked as required. C. Existing devices and circuiting which are shown are indicated only for informational purposes. Electrical Contractor shall visit the site and shall verify conditions as they exist and shall remove, relocate and/or rework any electrical equipment or circuits affected (whether indicated or not) due to removal or reworking of existing walls, ceilings, etc. Electrical Contractor shall familiarize himself with all work to be done by other trades by studying Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and Plumbing Drawings. D. Coordinate routing of all conduits with Mechanical and Plumbing Contractors in order to avoid conflicts with ducts, pipes, etc. E. All equipment, fixtures, devices, etc., which are removed shall be delivered to Owner for disposition. All items which are removed and not wanted by Owner and which are not reused shall become the property of Electrical Contractor and shall be removed from site. F. The cost of cutting and patching necessary for the installation or removal of electrical work shall be included in the Electrical Contract. Coordinate with General Contractor. 3.10 GUARANTEE: A. Guarantee all materials, labor, workmanship and successful operation of all equipment installed under this contract for a period of two years from date of final acceptance. Repair or replace, at no expense to Owner, all defects which may arise during this time due to inferior or defective materials, equipment, or workmanship. 3.11 SUBSTITUTIONS: A. The intent of Specifications is to establish quality standards of materials and equipment installed. Specific items are identified by Manufacturer, trade name or catalog designation. Should Contractor propose to furnish materials and equipment other than those specified as permitted by "or approved equal" clauses, he or she shall submit a written request in duplicate, at least five calendar days prior to bidding date, for any or all substitutions. Request shall be accompanied with complete descriptive and technical data and all other information deemed necessary by Engineer for evaluation. Substitutions submitted for approval shall list items as specified with the alternate substitution. B. Where substitutions alter the design, conduit, wiring or space requirements indicated on drawings, Contractor shall include items of cost for the revised design and construction, including that of other trades. C. Substitutions sent by fax machine will not be acceptable and will not be reviewed. 3.12 OUTAGES: A. Coordinate all electrical service outages with Owner and General Contractor. Plan all work so that duration of outage is kept to an absolute minimum. Provide temporary wiring as necessary and as required in order to maintain continuous service for Owner's operation where outage must be accomplished during a time when power is deemed necessary by Owner, or when outage is to be of an extended duration, maximum 6 hours. All outage time and scheduling of same shall be as approved by Owner and shall conform to Owner's schedules. 3.13 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS: A. Make provisions for delivery and safe storage of all materials and make the required arrangements with other Contractors on the job for the introduction into the building of equipment too large to pass through finished openings. B. Where materials are indicated to be furnished by others to Contractor for installation, these materials shall be checked and their delivery properly receipted. Assume full responsibility for the storage and safe keeping of said materials from time of delivery until final acceptance. 3.14 AVAILABLE TO OWNER: A. Electrical Contractor shall be available to Owner for additional hook up to lights, equipment, etc., on time and material. END OF SECTION 16010 SECTION 16100 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 STANDARDS: A. All materials shall be new, shall be UL listed for the purpose intended, and shall bear the UL label. Damaged or defective materials shall be replaced. All materials shall comply with latest NEMA standards. 1.2 BALANCING A. The complete system shall be load balanced to within 10 to 15 percent per phase. 1.3 PHASE ROTATION A. Electrical Contractor shall assure and be responsible for proper phase rotation of all motors, compressors, and other three phase equipment prior to energizing equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS GENERAL A. Provide branch circuit distribution panelboards for all general lighting and power circuits where indicated. Panels shall be flush or surface mounted as indicated. Provide panels with main lugs only or with main breakers as indicated. Main breakers, where specified, shall be located at top center of panel, bolted to bus bars. Back connected branch circuit breakers are not acceptable as main breakers. Panels shall be of voltage, phase, number of wires, copper bus size as indicated. Provide number and size of full width, thermal magnetic, bolted-breakers as indicated. All breakers shall be quick break, quick make and shall have an internal trip free mechanism; two and three pole breakers shall be internally "common trip" and shall have a common operating handle. All panels shall have a minimum width of 17 inches. All panels shall have flush, hinge in door covers equipped with master keyed locks. All panels shall have copper ground busses. All two section panels shall have matching trim sizes for each section. B. Panelboards shall be by same manufacturer as main distribution center. 2.2 SAFETY SWITCHES: A. Provide fusible and non-fusible heavy duty type disconnect switches where shown and required. Switches shall be horsepower rated, quick make, and quick-break, by same manufacturer as panelboards. 2.3 FUSES A. Provide sizes, classes and types of fuses as indicated for all fused safety switches. All fuses 0-600 amps shall have the Class "R" rejection feature. Verify actual load current of all motors prior to ordering fuses and provide fuses of sizes as recommended by Manufacturer. Generally, motor fuses shall be the dual-element, time-delay, type RK5 and shall be set at 125 percent of full load amps. Fuses shall be the power voltage rating to match circuit characteristics in which installed. Fuses indicated on drawings are those of Bussmann Co., equal by Gould Shawmut or Littel Fuse. 2.4 SPARE FUSES A. Provide three spare fuses of each size and type installed. Place in existing Spare Fuse Cabinet. 2.5 NAMEPLATES A. Provide 1 x 3 inch laminated plastic nameplates (1/4 inch high white letters; black background for normal power equipment, red background for Generator powered equipment) for all switches, panelboards, controllers, etc., in main distribution switchboards and sub-distribution panelboards. Nameplates shall be permanently attached to equipment with two stainless-steel screws or rivets. Provide blank nameplates for all spares. B. Multiple Gang Light Switches: Provide engraved coverplates 1/8 inch lettering black filled on all switch plates two and more ganged. Lettering shall indicate area served. C. Light switches/receptacles (all): Provide panel and circuit Kroy labels on front of coverplate and label with marker on inside panel cover and circuit also. D. Label all mechanical equipment, safety switches, and starters, etc., with laminated plastic nameplates. Nameplates and labels shall indicate the general areas and type of electrical load served by each circuit. E. Neatly label all Junction box coverplates as to their function. Use a permanent ink pen. Labeling shall be lights, smoke detector power, elevator control, fire alarm, receptacles, etc. Labeling shall be done on J-boxes that are above accessible ceiling and in storage rooms and maintenance areas, etc. Do not label J-boxes in public view. 2.6 NM-NONMETALLIC SHEATHED CABLE NOT ALLOWED ON THIS PROJECT: 2.7 CONDUCTORS: A. Provide a complete system of conductors for all raceway systems. All conductors shall be rated 600V, and shall be of a manufacturer subscribing to applicable IPCEA and NEMA standards and practices. Conductors shall be of sizes and types as indicated, and as required by NEC for specific uses. Where quantities of conductors in a raceway system are not specifically indicated, provide number as required to maintain function, control and number of circuits as indicated. All conductors shall be UL listed and approved, and shall conform to the following: 1. Minimum wire size shall be #12 AWG copper except for control or signal circuits which may be #14 AWG copper. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, all wiring for branch circuits shall be copper #12 AWG in 1/2" conduit, protected by 20 ampere circuit breakers. See Voltage Drop. 3. Voltage Drop: If distance from panel to first outlet is 75 feet or greater (for 120V circuits), #10 shall be installed from circuit breaker to every device in circuit. 4. Wire sizes #10 AWG copper and smaller shall be solid; #8 AWG copper and larger shall be stranded. 5. The following insulation standards shall apply: a. All feeder conductors shall be type THWN, XHHW or RHW. b. Other conductors shall be per NEC THHN/THWN copper unless noted otherwise, Article 310. c. Type THHN/THWN copper for exterior runs in conduit. 6. Motor wiring for power shall be stranded. B. Aluminum conductors shall not be used on this project. 7. The use of MC (Metal Clad) and AC (Armored Cable), or flexible conduit shall not be used for branch circuits or feeders. 2.8 CONDUITS: A. Conduits shall be provided for all wiring runs as shown and specified. All sizes shall be per NEC. Use GRC where required by code, utility company, for mechanical protection and as shown. Type IMC may be used in lieu of GRC where permitted. Use EMT for all other runs. Provide approved couplings and connectors for all connections. Final connections to motors and other vibrating or rotating equipment shall be made in liquid-tight flexible conduit (LFMC). B. Heavywall, type II, rigid, Schedule 40 PVC: 1. For all wiring runs in or under the floor slab which is in contact with the ground. 2. For all wiring runs buried underground, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Do not use Schedule 40 or 80 PVC above ground. Conduit sizes 1" and smaller use schedule 80 PVC elbows and conduit sizes 1 1/4" and larger use GRC PVC coated elbows to max. 6" above grade then change to EMT conduit. Note: Provide expansion joints in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. C. Use approved type couplings and connectors in all conduit runs and make all joints tight. Provide insulated bushings for all terminations in pipe size 1 1/4" and larger. Provide all steel set screw couplings and connectors for all other conduits. Provide expansion fitting and bonding conductors for all runs which cross building expansion joints. Provide waterproof steel compression gland couplings and connections for all runs in wet locations such as exposed to weather, buried in slabs, etc. 2.9 SUPPORTS AND HANGERS: A. Provide supports and hangers as necessary and as required to insure a good and substantial installation. Support raceways, fixtures, cabinets, boxes, etc., on approved types of trapeze hangers or wall brackets as manufactured by Unistrut or acceptable equal. Provide steel hanger rods securely fastened to or through the building structure for all trapezes, etc. Do not suspend from mechanical piping or ductwork. Perforated plumber's straps or wire will not be permitted. B. Obtain Architect's approval for the use of powder powered fasteners and use only in locations as they may direct. 2.10 OUTLETS: A. Outlets shall be galvanized steel or zinc pressed steel outlet boxes for all locations except where otherwise indicated or where cast metal boxes are required by NEC. Boxes are to be 4" square or octagonal, 2 1/8” Depth minimum. Provide plaster or tile rings for all flush outlets installed where wood, drywall, tile, plaster, etc., types of finishes are applied. All outlets for exterior application shall be cast, weatherproof type, with gasket and case coverplate. Tile boxes of extra depth may be used for interior, dry applications where masonry block or brick walls constitute the finished wall surface. In any event, provide outlet boxes of proper type and design for the particular fixture or device to be installed. Boxes shall be as manufactured by Steel City or acceptable equal. B. Surface mounted boxes shall be cast metal weatherproof, with grounding terminal, threaded hubs, and shall be similar and equal to Crouse-Hinds design Type FD or FS. C. Pull Boxes: Provide pull boxes in raceway runs as required by NEC and job conditions. Install in accessible locations. D. Surface Raceway: Surface raceway boxes same manufacturer as surface raceway. 2.11 DEVICES AND PLATES: A. Receptacles: Provide the following flush receptacle devices where indicated and required. Verify color with Architect prior to order. All devices to be Specification Grade with screw type terminals. Provide as shown or acceptable equal. 1. Devices: a. 20A- 3W, grd, duplex dedicated outlet Leviton-5263-White b. W.P. lift lid, duplex TayMac-503-S1G, A4 For GFI TayMac S2GA4 c. Ground Fault 20 amp Leviton-6899-White 2. Switches a. 20A switches Leviton-1221-White b. 3-way switches Leviton-1223-White 3. Coverplates a. Finished and unfinished areas are to provide .040 smooth nylon White finished coverplates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PANELBOARDS AND LOADCENTERS A. Install panels up six feet six inches to top of panel or as directed by Architect. 3.2 SAFETY SWITCHES A. All exterior mounted disconnects 12 feet and less above finished grade shall have padlocks; master laminated type minimum 3/16 inch shafts, master keyed, to lock disconnect doors 3.3 CONDUCTORS: A. Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet or J-box. Splices shall be held to a minimum. Where necessary, splice in readily accessible pull box, J-box, or outlet box. The joint insulation value shall equal that of the conductor. Splices and connections shall be made in an approved manner. B. Install wiring in the raceway systems only after the conduit run has been completed and after such time as conduits have been thoroughly cleaned and dried. C. Enclose underground/exterior conductors in conduit schedule 40 PVC. All secondary and exterior branch circuit conductors to be buried a minimum of 30 inches below finished grade. Provide 2 inches of sand fill above and below conductors and install electrical marker tape 6 inches above all runs. D. Wire and cable No. 6 and smaller shall be factory color coded. Where factory color is not available, or where on short runs factory color coding is not practical, mark conductors on each end and in J-boxes or pull boxes with 1" band of colored pressure sensitive plastic tape or by the use of brilliant waterproof lacquer properly applied. Colors for each phase and the neutral shall be consistent throughout the system. 1. The following color code prevails for all service, feeder and branch circuits: Neutral White for 120V Ground Green Phase A Black for 120/208V Phase B Red for 120/208V Phase C Blue for 120/208V E. Wire and cable shall be the proper size to fit under lug landings in accordance with UL listing. Where Phase C Blue for 120/208V E. Wire and cable shall be the proper size to fit under lug landings in accordance with UL listing. Where larger wire and cable is used for voltage drop, etc., and will not fit under UL lug listings, Electrical Contractor shall provide proper wire and cable size under lugs and either pigtail to larger wire and cable or use power tap blocks. Provide insulation value equal to the wire and cable being used. F. High Compression Termination: Provide high compression terminations for connecting smaller conductors to larger for voltage drop issues as shown on drawings. H-type compression tap connectors shall be for copper combinations, sized for correct conductor installation using 15 ton and 12 ton head tools per manufacturer UL listed. Manufacturer Thomas and Betts. Compression taps series 63100 with high compression tool. Provide shop drawings. Provide interlocking insulating hard covers and secure with tape sealant per manufacturer, UL listed. Manufacturer Thomas and Betts Series HTCX00 (H-Tap Insulating Hard Covers), and HSTS25 Series. Provide shop drawings. G. Terminations Exterior 1. Terminations shall be silicone filled safety connectors. Connector body shall consist of color-coded shell of non-hygroscopic material, with ribs or wings for easy grip and vibration-absorbing retention fingers. Inside shall be a non-setting, non-conductive, fire-retardant silicone sealant that eliminates the possibility of corrosion and flashover. The connector shall have a plated, conical, square-wire spring to draw in conductors securely as torque is applied. 2. Connectors shall be King Technology's Model King-1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and/or 9 wire connectors for pressure-type locations or accepted equal. H. Provide cable wraps (nylon ty wraps) around branch circuit bundles and feeder bundles in all switchboards, panelboards, and loadcenters. 3.4 CONDUCTOR NEUTRAL APPLICATIONS A. Neutrals: Copper, same size as phase conductor, derating neutrals not allowed. B. Provide separate Neutral conductors for each 15 or 20 amp single pole breaker, all the circuits: 1. All circuits using common raceway shall contain separate neutrals or provide tie handles on branch circuit breaker per NEC. 3.5 CONDUITS: A. Slab on grade: Conduits shall not be located in slab but 6" below, thus cutting of slab will not damage conductors and conduit. B. All conduits shall be installed concealed in finished areas. Exposed conduits will be permitted only at surface cabinets, in mechanical equipment rooms, and as otherwise permitted by Architect. C. Route all conduits either parallel or perpendicular to walls and structural members, always avoiding proximity to sources of heat such as flues, hot water lines, etc. Runs which are buried below the floor slab or underground may be run direct (angular) to fullest practical extent. Locate raceways so as not to endanger the strength of any structural members. All runs pertinent to the building structural system shall be installed only when and in manner as approved by Architect. Actual conduit runs are not necessarily indicated, but are to be installed in the most feasible manner compatible with building construction and work of other crafts. Outlets shown connected together must be wired on the same circuit. D. All bends to be made by the use of an approved bending tool. Cut all conduits square and ream all cuts to remove burrs. Exercise all necessary precautions during the construction period to prevent entry or accumulation of moisture, dust, concrete, and all foreign matter into the raceway system. Clean and dry all raceways prior to pulling conductors. E. Secure all raceway systems in building structure in a rigid and secure manner using approved type fasteners such as "Caddy Clips" or similar type of other manufacturer. The use of wire, plumber's straps, etc., will not be permitted. Locations and spacing of fasteners shall be as required by NEC. F. Conduit hangers, clamps, light fixtures, supports, nails, etc., shall be fastened to joists or beams only. Do not support from bottom of roof decking or mechanical ductwork. G. Notching of wood studs (where used) for conduit routing shall not be allowed. Drill center of studs if hole gets closer than 1" to face of studs. Provide 3/16" steel protective plates. H. All roof penetrations done by Electrical Contractor must conform to General Contractor's standard criteria and shall be subject to his authorized Roofing Contractor. General Contractor shall pay all such costs directly to Roofing Contractor upon demand. I. Conduits penetrating through fire-rated walls and floor slabs shall be sealed against the spread of fire and products of combustion with smoke-rating of the floor or wall through which conduits pass. See Drawings for additional requirements. 3.6 WIRING ABOVE SUSPENDED CEILINGS A. Approved Class II wiring systems such as controls, telephone, intercom, TV, Fire Alarm, etc., may be routed without conduit on bridal rings, (5 feet on center and neatly trained) where above suspended accessible ceiling systems unless otherwise indicated. Where wiring runs occur in inaccessible construction such as underfloor, in walls, above gypsum board ceilings, etc., provide all necessary outlets and conduits stubbed into nearest accessible suspended ceiling space. Wiring in all exposed areas shall be routed in conduit such as, exposed ceiling, surface mounted on walls and etc. All conduit stubs shall be tagged. Where suspended ceiling plenums are used for transportation of environmental air and where required by local inspection authority, all Class II wiring runs shall be enclosed in an approved raceway system or approved return plenum cable on bridal ring system. This shall include all systems such as telephone, data, etc., even though this Contractor is not providing the cables or conductors. Refer to Article 300-22 of NEC. B. Where suspended ceiling plenums are used for transportation of environmental air and where required by local inspection authority, all Class II wiring runs shall be enclosed in an approved raceway system or Teflon cable approved for return air plenum application. This shall include all systems such as telephone, etc., even though this Contractor is not providing cables or conductors. Refer to Article 300-22 of NEC. 3.7 OUTLETS: A. Install all outlets in a secure and substantial manner and locate so as to be compatible with space, construction and equipment requirements, and with the work of other trades. Verify final outlet locations with Architect prior to installation. Install all outlets plumb and in accessible locations. Flush outlets are to be installed with front of box or ring flush with finished surface. All outlets are to be installed flush unless used in conjunction with exposed conduit system or unless otherwise indicated. If outlets are not installed plumb, flush, level or in approved locations, relocate or reset and refinish at no additional cost to Owner. B. Mount all weatherproof (WP) outlets vertically. C. J-boxes shall not be stacked atop or use of multiple extension rings on each other to form single J-boxes. Single J-boxes shall be used of proper size per NEC. 3.8 COVERPLATES A. Install oversized or "mistake plates" for any outlet where standard sized plate will not cover rough in opening. Provide ganged plates for combination devices and multiple device installation as required. Install plates with holes sized to accommodate cable to be installed for all telephone and computer outlets. B. Provide blank coverplate for all unused outlet boxes, i.e. voice, data, and power outlets at time of final observation. 3.9 FIRE PENETRATIONS A. Provide fire rated stops to maintain fire ratings of walls, ceilings and floors. B. Conduits may penetrate the walls, ceilings, floors or partitions provided fire stopping is provided per current International Building Code. END OF SECTION 16100 SECTION 16400 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Furnish and install a complete electrical system as shown on drawings and specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUNDING SYSTEM: A. Ground the entire electrical distribution system, including all raceways, outlets, fixtures, equipment, etc., in full accord with NEC. B. Provide separate grounding conductor in all raceways. C. Provide separate grounding jumper from the grounding screw of all receptacle devices to the metallic box in which mounted. Jumper may attach to box with a separate grounding screw or clip device. Jumpers may be eliminated if approved self-grounding devices are used. D. Provide separate bonding conductor, bare copper, for runs of flexible conduit where required by NEC. E. Provide separate grounding conductor in all runs to exterior lighting standards, such as post lights, signs, etc. F. All conductors used for grounding and bonding purposes shall be copper, insulated green, only. END OF SECTION 16400 SECTION 16620 - STANDBY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 INTENT OF SPECIFICATION: A. It is the intent and purpose of these specifications to install a backup electric power system. These specifications cover requirements for the testing, and installation for a complete and operable electric power system. All installation material and parts of the backup system shall be new and unused. 1.2 SCOPE: The installation of the standby electric power system shall include the following: A. Natural gas and liquefied propane engine driven GenSet to provide standby power. It shall be by Kohler, Onan, Cummins, Generac or prior approved equal. B. Engine start/stop control system mounted on the electric set. C. Automatic load transfer switch to provide automatic starting and stopping of the engine and switching the load. It shall be by same manufacturer as generator. D. Accessories as specified. 1.3 SYSTEM RESPONSIBILITY: A. The optional standby electric power system shall be designed, fabricated, and tested by the manufacturer so there is one source of supply and responsibility. The manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in the production of engine driven GenSets, automatic transfer switches, switchgear, and associated control products for the last fifteen years. Sets which are assembled components by a service type facility are not acceptable. 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: A. It is the intent and purpose of these specifications to secure the necessary controls and accessories to the extent that this equipment will comprise a complete operating package under the following environmental conditions: 1. Altitude: 5,000 feet above sea level 2. Maximum ambient temperature: 40 degrees C. 3. Minimum ambient temperature: -20 degrees C. PART 2 PRODUCTS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DUAL FUEL (NG/LP) ENGINE DRIVEN ELECTRIC SET: A. Manufacturers: Work in this section is restricted to specific products of specific manufacturers that have been previously approved: 1. Kohler Co.; Generator Division (Basis of Design) 2. Caterpillar; Engine Div. 3. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group. 4. Generac 5. Smith Power Products 6. Blue Star Power Systems, Inc. B. Rating: The rating of the GenSet shall be based on operation of the set when equipped with all necessary operating accessories. The GenSet shall be rated and capable of producing 180KW for continuous standby power service under the environmental conditions specified in Section 1.04. C. Prototype Testing: The power system, consisting of prime mover, generator, transfer switches and all controls necessary to operate prime mover, generator and transfer switches, must be tested as a complete system on a representative engineering prototype model. The tests being potentially damaging to the equipment tested must not be performed on equipment sold, but on separate prototype models. These tests to include: 1. Maximum power level. 2. Maximum motor starting capacity. Generator set must sustain at least 90% of no load voltage for ten seconds with 250% of rated load zero power factor connected to its terminals. 3. Endurance tests: The prototype generator set must have been subjected to a minimum of 500 hours of endurance testing at rated load and speed with no fatigue failures of electrical or mechanical components. 4. Structural soundness. 5. Torsiograph analysis per MIL STD 705B, method 504.2. 6. Fuel consumption. 7. Engine: Alternator cooling air flow. 8. Transient response and steady state governing. 9. Alternator temperature rise per NEMA MG1 22.40 definition. 10. Single step load pickup. 11. Harmonic analysis and voltage waveform deviation per MIL STD 705B, method 601.4. 12. Three phase short circuit test: The generator must be short circuited at its terminals on all three phases for a duration of ten seconds with system operating at rated volts, amps, power factor and speed. When the short circuit is removed, the generator output must return to normal without manual intervention of any kind (such as resetting breakers or other tripping devices). This test to be repeated ten times. Disassembly and inspection after the test must reveal no electrical or mechanical damage to any system component. D. Performance: The performance of the GenSet series shall be certified as to the sets full power rating, stability, and voltage and frequency regulation by an independent testing laboratory. The GenSet shall be free of injurious torsional stresses within plus or minus 10% of rated speed. E. Exceptions: Major exceptions to these specifications will be considered sufficient cause of rejection of bids. F. Modifications: The GenSet shall include standard controls and equipment plus the following modifications: 1. Radiator duct adapter. 2. Water jacket heater, 850 watt, 115 VAC. 3. Generator output circuit breaker, 800 amp. 4. Solid state engine monitor with nine fault lights, four shutdowns and common external alarm terminals. 5. Meter panel to include: a. AC ammeter. b. Volt meter. c. Volt meter. Ammeter phase selector with an OFF position. d. Frequency meter. e. Console mounted voltage adjusting rheostat. f. Accessories: The following accessories shall be supplied loose for field installations: 1. Fuel transfer pump, 120 VAC, 1/3 HP. 2. Batteries, 12 volt. 3. Battery pack: mounted on unit. 4. Battery warming pad, 1000w, 120V. 5. Battery charger to be mounted in transfer sw. 6. Exhaust silencer: critical and rain cap. 7. Flex exhaust tube: seamless. 8. Fuel Solenoid Valve. 9. Highest Level sound attenuating cabinet. 2.2 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH: A. Rating: The transfer switch shall be rated for total system loads, including motor loads, electric discharge lamps and tungsten filament loads. Tungsten filament loads are not to exceed 30% of the switch rating. The transfer switch shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of 40 degrees C ( 40 degrees F) to +67 degrees C (142 degrees F). 1. The transfer switch shall be 3 pole, rated 600 amps, 600 VAC, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 hertz. B. Prototype Testing: 1. A prototype transfer switch shall have passed the tests in Underwriter's Laboratories Bulletin 1008. 2. A prototype transfer switch shall have passed the Environmental Tests listed in Military Standard 202E. C. Controls: 1. Undervoltage sensors each phase. 2. Time delay start. 3. Time delay transfer. 4. Time delay retransfer. 5. Time delay stop. 6. Exerciser clock. 7. Load/no load switch for exercise mode. 8. Diagnostic signal system. 9. 10 amp, 12 volt battery charger. D. Same manufacturer as generator. PART 3 INSTALLATION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. The standby electric power system shall be installed, including all connections, where and as indicated on drawings and wiring diagrams as specified herein, and in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's instruction. B. Bolt the set to anchor fastened in the concrete pad. When anchors are set in the pad, the bolts shall be in place when concrete is poured to prevent filling of anchor holes. The generator shall be grounded to local grounding systems. C. Electrical contractor shall install equipment furnished by manufacturer for a complete system along with hardware, conduit, conductors, terminations, etc. to form a complete operable system. D. Mechanical contractor shall furnish and install all equipment required to run generator i.e. muffler pipe, gas pipe, automatic air louvers for ventilation, etc. 3.2 INITIAL STARTUP, SYSTEM CHECK OUT & TEST: A. The complete installation shall be initially started and checked out for operational compliance by representatives of the manufacturer. The engine lubrication oil and antifreeze, as recommended by the manufacturer for operation under environmental conditions specified, shall be provided by the electrical contractor. 3.3 WARRANTY: A. The standby electric power system installation shall be covered by a five year limited warranty and shall be effective from date of initial start up and shall be detailed in available written documents. END OF SECTION 16620 SECTION 16900 - ELECTRICAL COMPLETION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL: A. The entire electrical system shall be left in first-class workable operating condition and all work shall be complete. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DIRECTORY CARDS: A. Provide labels and neatly typed directory cards for all new and existing panelboards and loadcenters. Directory cards shall indicate the general area and type of electrical load served by each circuit. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CLEAN UP: A. Remove all materials, scrap, etc., relative to the electrical installation and leave the premises in a clean, orderly condition. Any costs to Owner for clean-up of the site will be charged against Contractor. B. Clean all electrical equipment and materials of all foreign matter. Clean all light fixtures using only methods and materials as recommended by Manufacturer. 3.2 ACCEPTANCE DEMONSTRATION: A. Upon completion of the work, at a time to be designated by Architect, Contractor shall demonstrate to Owner the operation of the entire electrical installation, including any and all special systems provided under this contract. 3.3 TEMPORARY WIRING: A. Remove all temporary wiring, outlets, etc., complete. 3.4 DRAWINGS: A. Deliver Record Drawings to Owner. END OF SECTION 16900 workshop ARCHI TECT S+URBANIST S www.auworkshop.co [ ]au - P L O T D A T E A 6 5 4 3 2 6 5 4 3 2 B C D A B C D 1 E 1 E issue date: project #: T - 970.430.5220 401 Linden St | Unit 221 Fort Collins, CO, 80524 © 2020 www.auworkshop.co 1912 UT I L I T I E S S E R V I C E CE N T E R R E N O V A T I O N 70 0 W O O D S T R E E T FO R T C O L L I N S , C O 8 0 5 2 1 CI T Y O F F O R T C O L L I N S PERMIT DOCUMENTS 08 JULY 2022 08/25/22 ELECTRICAL CHANGES E600 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 135 of 234 PROJECT NAME: PROJECT #: MODEL(s): SUPPLIER:Cummins Sales and Service DATE: SALES REPRESENTATIVE:Josh King 317‐681‐4546 josh.king@cummins.com PROJECT MANAGER :Blake Sarmiento 502‐991‐1019 blake.sarmiento@cummins.com Revised ‐ UBG 200 NG 11/4/2022 CUSTOMER: Unified Building Group REFERENCE PO #:PO-001 367042 C200N6 OTEC400 RE V I S E D SU B M I T T A L PO W E R GE N E R A T I O N EQ U I P M E N T X 11/18/2022 WMC 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 136 of 234 NOTICE A COPY OF THIS SUBMITTAL MUST BE RETURNED TO OUR OFFICE, APPROVED IN ITS ENTIRETY AND BEARING THE DATE OF APPROVAL, STAMP OR SIGNATURE AND TITLE OF THE APPROVING AUTHORITY, BEFORE ANY ITEM WILL BE RELEASED FOR MANUFACTURE OR SHIPMENT. WE ASSUME NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR DELAYS IN OUR FORECASTED SHIPPING SCHEDULES ON ANY ITEM ON WHICH SUBMITTAL APPROVAL IS BEYOND THIRTY (30) DAYS FROM THE SUBMISSION DATE ON THE COVER PAGE. THIS SUBMITTAL IS BASED UPON OUR INTERPRETATION OF THE PROJECT REQUIREMENTS AND/OR SPECIFICATIONS AND IS IN ACCORDANCE WITH YOUR ORDER AND PRODUCT AVAILABILITY. PLEASE REVIEW THE ENCLOSED DATA COMPLETELY AND CAREFULLY. SHOULD ADDITIONAL INFORMATION OR CLARIFICATION BE REQUIRED, PLEASE FORWARD A SUBMITTAL COPY, COMPLETE WITH YOUR NOTATIONS, TO OUR OFFICE WITHIN THIRTY (30) DAYS FOR A PROMPT RESPONSE AND/OR RESUBMITTAL. CONSIDERABLE ATTENTION IS GIVEN TO THE PREPARATION OF THIS SUBMITTAL TO ENSURE IT IS COMPLETE, CONCISE AND CORRECT AS POSSIBLE. PLEASE REVIEW IT CAREFULLY AND THOROUGHLY. For questions or comments regarding this submittal, please contact your Cummins Sales Representativelisted on the Cover Page. Serving Cummins Customers in the Northern Region 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 137 of 234 FSR5 NAS‐C200N6 S‐1570 S‐1642 PC500 Local Network 25315 NAD‐C200N6 ADS‐211 MSP‐4053 M130 NPSIB11.1NGP C200N6‐02 A059J022 INT‐9024 INT‐9011 AC‐150 Battery Heater NAAC‐5602 S‐1472 S‐6556 S‐6560 0310‐1307 A065P280 A029Y876 PSU‐001 PSU‐002 TABLE OF CONTENTS Remote Annunciator SECTION 5 ‐ ATS SPECIFICATION SHEETS & DRAWINGS ATS Specification Sheet ATS Control ATS Outline Drawing Alternator Sound Data Sheet Circuit Breaker Exhaust Emission Compliance Statement SECTION 3 ‐ GENERATOR DRAWINGS & INTERCONNECTIONS Generator & Enclosure Critical Grade Silencer SECTION 1 ‐ PROJECT INFORMATION Bill of Material Battery Charger Specification Sheet Generator Warranty Statement Transfer Switch Warranty Statement Generator Startup Transfer Switch Startup Interconnection ‐ Battery Charger SECTION 4 ‐ GENERATOR ACCESSORIES Fuel Supply Requirements SECTION 2 ‐ GENERATOR SPECIFICATION & DATA SHEETS Generator Specification Sheet SECTION 6 ‐ STARTUP & WARRANTY PowerCommand Control Enclosure Data Sheet Interconnection ‐ Control, PC500, Annunciator & Transfer Switch Sales andService 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 138 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 139 of 234 Project: Unified Building Group - Colorado Page 1 of 2 Bill of Material Feature Code Description Qty 0333-0469 Battery Heater-120VAC, 200Watt 2 C200N6 Genset - Spark Ign, Dual Fuel NG/LP Vapor, 60Hz, 200kW 1 ENG PSI11 SB, 302 HP, 10.5:1, Factory Certified for Emissions 1 CAT Catalyst, 4.7" x 3.22" Rectangular Flange, 3.51" Opening, NSPS 2/4/1 1 A331-2 Duty Rating - Standby Power 1 L090-2 Listing - UL 2200 1 C065-2 Dual Fuel NG/LP Vapor 1 F202-2 Enclosure - Sound Att, LEVEL 2, Carbon Steel, Base Mtd, with Exhaust System 1 P187-2 Onan Green Enclosure Color 1 B267-2 Generator - UCDI274J (ADS #212), 60Hz, Winding 311 - 12 Wire, 120C, 0.8pf 1 R098-2 Voltage - 120/208, 3ph 1 B184-2 Exciter / Regulator - PMG, 3 Phase Sensor 1 KX21-2 Set Control - Power Command 3.3 MLD 1 H609-2 Controls Facing Left 1 E082-2 Radiator Cooled 1 H389-2 Shutdown - Low Coolant Level 1 H036-2 Coolant Heater_40°F MinAmbientTemp 1 E098-2 Sightglass on Radiator 1 A366-2 Engine Governor - Electronic, Isochronous Only 1 A334-2 Engine Starter - 24 VDC Motor 1 A333-2 Battery Charging Alternator - Normal Output 1 D041-2 Engine Air Cleaner - Normal Duty 1 H706-2 Lube Oil, Engine Filled Prior to Shipment 1 H669-2 Anti-Freeze - 50/50 Mix, System Filled Prior to Shipment 1 A466-2 Critical Grade Silencer, Carbon Steel 1 H268-2 Extension - Oil Drain 1 E089-2 Extension - Engine Coolant Drain 1 H606-2 Bargraph - AC Analog Meters 1 0300-5929-02 Annunciator (RS485) 1 L050-2 Manuals in English 1 F065-2 Battery Rack 1 A465-2 Battery Charger, 120/208 VAC, 10A, 24V 1 provide with automatic fuel transfer 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 140 of 234 Project: Unified Building Group - Colorado Page 2 of 2 149-0751 Fuel Strainer - Gaseous, 2in NPT 1 MM-2-15 Flexible Fuel Connection - Gaseous, 2in NPT 1 KS53-2 Signals-Aux, Input / Output 1 M129-2 Circuit Breaker - LSi_800A_80%, 600/525V 1 L189-2 Genset Warranty - Standby, 5 yr / 2500 hours parts, labor and travel 1 F997-02 Std CB Mounting Option 1 F999-02 Right Side Mounting 1 Owner Training and Approval 1 NSBOP21 Service - start up & testing 1 OTECC OTECC, OTEC Transfer Switch-Electronic Control: 300A/400A/600A 1 OTEC400 OTEC400, Transfer Switch, PowerCommand, 400 Amp 1 A046-7 Listing - UL 1008/CSA Certification 1 A035-7 Application - Utility to Genset 1 B001-7 Cabinet - Type 1 1 A028-7 Poles - 3 (Solid Neutral) 1 A044-7 Frequency - 60 Hz 1 A042-7 System - 3 Phase, 3 or 4 Wire 1 R021-7 Voltage - 208 Volts AC 1 M034-7 Genset Starting Battery - 24V DC 1 C110-7 PC40 Control 1 M081-7 Interface - Communications Network, MODBUS RTU Module 1 G009-7 Transfer Switch Warranty - 1 Year Comprehensive 1 NSBOP22 Service - load bank testing - 2 hours 1 BE 004D-2 24VDC Engine Starting Batteries - 1000CCA 1 A062J030 PowerCommand 500 Local Network no CE 1 NOTES: Proposal is for equipment only, offloading, rigging, and installation by others. Fuel and permits, unless listed above, is not included. Cummins Standard Start-up and testing is included. Additional tests, such as NETA testing, if required, is by others Coordination Study not provided. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 141 of 234 IMPORTANT! FUEL SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS Fuel Source: ___________________ Fuel Consumption at Full Load: ____________ SCFH Required Operating Fuel Pressure: ______________ in H2O Fuel pressure required at the engine mounted regulator while the generator set is in operation, no load to full load. Please Note: The pressure listed is not a static pressure. If the above pressure is not maintained while the generator set is operating up to full load, the system will not function as required and the fuel delivery system will need to be reworked to provide operating pressure as listed. Required Fuel Pressure AND Volume MUST be available under ALL operating conditions at the generator set location. All generator sets must be installed with a flexible fuel line and fuel strainer prior to the engine connection: Flexible Fuel Line: [ ] included loose accessory [ ] included engine mounted Fuel Strainer: [ ] included loose accessory Natural Gas / Liquid Propane Vapor 2115.0 / 814.0 7.0 - 11.0 coordinate with Mechanical 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 142 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 143 of 234 Gaseous fuelgenerator set Specification sheet NAS-C200N6 cummins.com November 2021 Description You can count on the 130-200 kW natural gas generator set (GenSet) for the reliability, quality, and dependability that is genuine Cummins performance. EPA-certified, this fully-integrated power generation system provides optimum performance and versatility for stationary standby and prime power applications. Features • Power Solutions International (PSI) industrial engine - rugged 4-cycle industrial spark-ignited engine delivers reliable power, low emissions, and quick response to load changes • Over 100 years of Cummins power generation technology and innovation • Listed to UL 2200 standards (standby) and CSA standards (natural gas) for all low voltage models • Stamford rugged and reliable alternator with state-of-the-art technology • One-year (prime) and two-year (standby) base warranty supported by a worldwide Cummins twenty-four hour, seven days-a-week, distributor network • Accepts 100% rated load in a single step • Capable of meeting NFPA 110 Type 10 for Level 1 emergency or standby power supply systems (EPSSs) when installed and operated per Cummins and NFPA guidelines • Efficient and convenient operation monitoring and control options: - Modbus over the Internet (monitor and control) - Remote HMI (monitor and control) • Optional Power Command Control (PCC) 3300 technology provides digital (precise) frequency and voltage regulation Model Power rating 60 Hz kW (kVa) Emissions Data sheet Standby Prime Propane NG NG C200N6 130 (163)200 (250) EPA-certified for stationary emergency and non-emergency applications NAD-C200N6 180 (225) EPA-certified for stationary non-emergency and MOH-certified applications 130 kW - 200 kW 60 Hz 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 144 of 234 2 cummins.comNAS-C200N6 November 2021 Engine specifications Base engine Power Solutions International (PSI) 11.1L Displacement 677 in3 (11.1 L) Minimum battery capacity 900 amps at ambient temperature of 32 °F (0 °C) Battery charging alternator 45 amps Starting voltage 24-volt, negative ground Standard cooling system 122 °F (50 °C) Alternator specifications Design Brushless, 4-pole, drip-proof revolving field Stator 2/3 pitch Rotor Direct-coupled by flexible disc Insulation system Class H per NEMA MG1-1.65 or better Standard temperature rise*125 °C Exciter type Shunt or Permanent Magnet Generator (PMG) Phase rotation A (U), B (V), C (W) Alternator cooling Direct-drive centrifugal blower * For UL ratings, refer to temperature rise at 120 °C or below, and ambient temperature up to 40 °C Outline drawing This outline drawing is for reference only. Do not use for installation design. All models Dim “A” in. (cm) Dim “B” in. (cm) Dim “C” in. (cm) Open set - standby 123 (312) 60 (152) 74 (188) Open set - prime 159 (404) 64 (163) 75 (191) Weather- protective and sound- attenuated Level I & II enclosure - standby 159 (404) 60 (152) 85 (216) Weather- protective and sound- attenuated Level I & II enclosure - prime 159 (404) 64 (163) 85 (216) NOTE: Consult drawings for applicable weights. Contact the factory for additional information. Refer to drawings for specific weights & dimensions 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 145 of 234 3 cummins.comNAS-C200N6 November 2021 GenSet options and accessories Engine • 120/240 V, 2500 W coolant heater • 120 V, 400 W lube oil heater Alternator •80 °C rise • 105 °C rise • 125 °C rise (standby models, only) • 120/240 V, 200 W anti-condensation heater Fuel system - flexible fuel connector and fuel strainer Exhaust system • GenSet mounted muffler (enclosure models, only) • Critical grade silencer Generator set • PCC 3.3 Masterless Load Demand (MLD) controls • Batteries • Battery charger - 120/208/240 V, 10A • Main line circuit breaker • Electronically-operated (E.O.) generator breaker • PowerCommand Network Input/Output (I/O) module • PowerCommand Network Aux 101, 102 module • Remote control HMI with extension harness • Remote annunciator panel • Spring isolators • Audible alarm • Oil maintainer • Weather-protective enclosure with silencer • Sound-attenuated enclosure Level I and Level II with silencer • Warranty - five-year standby including parts, labor, and travel Applicable codes and standards Codes and standards compliance may not be available with all model configurations - consult factory for availability. The Underwriters Laboratory (UL) 2200 Listing is a comprehensive safety standard encompassing the design, construction, and performance of stationary GenSets. CSA Group tests products under a formal process to ensure that they meet the safety and/or performance requirements of applicable standards. This GenSet is certified to: CSA 22.2 No. 100 Motors and Generators; CSA 22.2 No. 0.4-044 Bonding of Electrical Equipment; CSA 22.2 No. 14 Industrial Control Equipment; and CSA 22.2 No. 0 General Requirements - Canadian Electrical Code, Part II. Engine is certified to Stationary Emergency and Non-Emergency U.S. EPA New Source Performance Standards (NSPS), 40 CFR 60 subpart JJJJ. U.S. applications must be applied per EPA regulations. Engine is certified to Mobile Non-Emergency U.S. EPA 60 CFR 1048 subpart JJJJ. This product has been manufactured under the controls established by a Bureau Veritas Certification approved management system that conforms with ISO 9001:2015. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 146 of 234 PowerCommand 3.3 control system An integrated microprocessor-based GenSet control system providing voltage regulation, engine protection, AmpSentry alternator protection, operator interface and isochronous governing. NAS-C200N6 November 2021 5 cummins.com Advanced control methodology • Designed for reliable operation in harsh environment. • Provides battery monitoring and testing features and smart starting control system. • Includes three-phase sensing, full wave rectified voltage regulation, with a PWM output for stable operation with all load types. • Digitally governed with temperature dynamic governing and integrated digital electronic isochronous governing. •Prototype tested - UL, CSA, and CE compliant. •Supports multiple languages- English, Spanish, and French (standard); other languages, optional. •Protects the engine- cranking lockout, overspeed shutdown, and battleshort; sensor failure indication; low fuel level warning or shutdown; low oil pressure warning and shutdown; high/low coolant temperature warning and shutdown; fail to start (overcrank) and fail to crank shutdown; and battery voltage monitoring, protection, and testing. •Enables paralleling control - direct control of the paralleling breaker and displays breaker status; First Start Sensor System selects first GenSet to close to bus; Phase Lock Loop Synchronizer with voltage matching; sync check relay; isochronous kW and kVar load sharing; load govern control for utility paralleling; extended Paralleling (baseload/peak shave) Mode; and digital power transfer control, for use with a breaker pair to provide open transition, closed transition, ramping closed transition, peaking and base load functions. •Includes AmpSentry alternator protection - over current and short circuit shutdown; over current warning; single and three-phase fault regulation; over and under voltage/frequency shutdown; overload warning with alarm contact; reverse power and reverse var shutdown; and field overload shutdown. • Cummins InPower PC-based service tool connects to the PowerCommand 3.3 control system for detailed diagnostics, setup, data logging, and fault simulation. • Comes standard with PCCNet and Modbus interface. • Allows for up to twenty configurable data inputs and outputs. State-of-the-art operator panel • Includes LED lamps indicating GenSet running, remote start, not in auto, common shutdown, common warning, manual run mode, auto mode and stop. •Displays engine data - DC voltage and engine speed; lube oil pressure and temperature; coolant temperature; and comprehensive full authority electronic (FAE) data. •Provides GenSet data - start attempts, starts, running hours, kW hours; load profile (operating hours at percent load in 5% increments); fault history – up to 32 events; data logging and fault simulation (requires InPower); air cleaner restriction indication; exhaust temperature in each cylinder. •Includes alternator data - Line-to-neutral and line-to-line AC volts; three-phase AC current; frequency; kW, kVar, and power factor kVa (three-phase and total); and winding temperature and/or bearing temperature (optional). Refer to document S-1570 for more detailed information. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 147 of 234 6 Cummins Inc. Box 3005 Columbus, IN 47202-3005 U.S.A. 1-800-CUMMINS™ (1-800-286-6467) cummins.com Printed in U.S.A. ©2021 Cummins Inc. NAS-C200N6 November 2021 Ratings definitions Emergency Standby Power (ESP): Applicable for supplying power to varying electrical load for the duration of power interruption of a reliable utility source. Emergency Standby Power (ESP) is in accordance with ISO 8528. Fuel Stop power is in accordance with ISO 3046, AS 2789, DIN 6271, and BS 5514. Prime Power (PRP): Applicable for supplying power to varying electrical load for unlimited hours. Prime Power (PRP) is in accordance with ISO 8528. Ten percent overload capability is available in accordance with ISO 3046, AS 2789, DIN 6271, and BS 5514. Base Load (Continuous) Power (COP): Applicable for supplying power continuously to a constant electrical load for unlimited hours. Continuous Power (COP) is in accordance with ISO 8528, ISO 3046, AS 2789, DIN 6271, and BS 5514. Demand Response Power Rating - Spark Ignited Gas (DRP): Applicable for supplying electrical power in parallel with commercially available power in variable and non-variable load applications. This fuel rating is intended for use in situations where power outages are contracted, such as in utility power curtailment. Engine operation is limited to a total of 500 hours per year. Engines may be operated in parallel to the public utility for up to 500 hours per year, with an average load factor no greater than 80% of rated Demand Response Power. Engines with Standby Power ratings available can be run in Emergency Standby applications up to the Standby Power rating for up to 50 hours per year. The customer should be aware, however, that the life of any engine will be reduced by constant high load operation. Warning: Backfeed to a utility system can cause electrocution and/or property damage. Do not connect GenSets to any building electrical system except through an approved device or after the building main disconnect is open. Neutral connection must be bonded in accordance with National Electrical Code. Specifications are subject to change without notice. Power You Can Rely On To order, contact centralregionordergs@cummins.com. Visit cummins.com to view all your power solutions. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 148 of 234 ©2022 Cummins Inc. | S-1570 (04/22) http://www.cummins.com Specification Sheet PowerCommand® 3.3 Generator Set Digital Integrated Control System Introduction The PowerCommand® 3.3 control system is a microprocessor-based generator set monitoring, metering, and control system, which is comprised of PowerCommand® Control 3300 and the Human Machine Interface 320. PCC3300 supports multiple operation modes including: • Standalone, • Synchronization only, • Isolated bus paralleling, • Utility single generator set paralleling, • Utility multiple generator set paralleling, • Utility single generator set paralleling with power transfer control (automatic mains failure), • Isolated bus paralleling with Masterless Load Demand PowerCommand® Control 3300 is designed to meet the exacting demands of the harsh and diverse environments of today's typical power generation applications for Full Authority Electronic or Hydromechanical engine power generator sets. Offering enhanced reliability and performance over more conventional generator set controls via the integration of all generator control functions into a single system, PCC3300 is your Power of One generator set control solution. Benefits and Features • 320 x 240 pixels graphical LED backlit LCD • Multiple languages supported • AmpSentry™ protection provides industry- leading generator overcurrent protection • Digital Power Transfer Control (Automatic Mains Failure) provides load transfer operation in open transition, closed transition, or soft (ramping) transfer modes • Extended Paralleling (Peak Shave/Base Load) regulates the genset real and reactive power output while paralleled to the utility. Power can be regulated at either the genset or utility bus monitoring point • Digital frequency synchronization and voltage matching • Isochronous Load Sharing • Droop kW and kVAr control • Real time clock for fault and event time stamping • Exerciser clock and time of day start/stop initiate a test with or without load, or a Base Load or Peak Shave session • Digital automatic voltage regulation is provided using three phase sensing and full wave FET type regulator, which is compatible with either shunt or PMG excited systems with a standard AUX103 AVR or an option for a more powerful high-current field drive capability AUX106 AVR • Digital engine speed governing is provided on applicable platforms • Generator set monitoring (including metering) and protection with PCC3300 measuring voltage, current, kW and kVAr offering a measurement accuracy of 1% • Utility / AC Bus metering and protection with PCC3300 voltage, current, kW and kVAr offering a measurement accuracy of 1% • 12 V (DC) and 24 V (DC) battery operation • RS-485 Modbus® interface for interconnecting to customer equipment • Warranty and service – Cummins Power Generation offers a comprehensive warranty and worldwide distributor service network • Global regulatory certification and compliance: PCC3300 is suitable for use on gensets that are designed, manufactured, tested and certified to relevant UL, NFPA, ISO, IEC, Mil Std., UKCA, and CE standards Bargraph Optional 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 149 of 234 ©2022 Cummins Inc. | S-1570 (04/22) http://www.cummins.com PowerCommand® Generator Set Digital Control System PCC 3300 Introduction PCC3300 is an industry-leading digital generator set control suitable for usage on a wide range of diesel and lean burn natural gas generator sets in both standalone as well as paralleling applications. PowerCommand® is compatible with either shunt or PMG excitation, and is suitable for usage with reconnectable or non-reconnectable generators. Configuration for any frequency, voltage and power connection from 120 V (AC) to 600 V (AC) line-to-line or 601 V (AC) to 45k V (AC) with an external PT is supported. The PCC3300 derives its own power from the generator set starting batteries and functions over a voltage range of 8 V (DC) to 30 V (DC). Features • PCC3300 supports configurable control features via software download using InPower PC- compatible software • 12 V (DC) and 24 V (DC) battery operation • Digital automatic voltage regulation is provided using three phase sensing and full wave FET type regulator, which is compatible with either shunt or PMG excited systems with a standard AUX103 AVR or an option for a more powerful high-current field drive capability AUX106 AVR • Digital engine speed governing on applicable platform is provided, which is capable of providing isochronous frequency regulation • Full authority J1939 CANBus® prime mover communications and control is provided for platforms with an Engine Control Module (ECM) • AmpSentry” protection provides industry-leading alternator overcurrent protection: - Time-based generator protection applicable to both line-to-line and line-to-neutral, that can detect an unbalanced fault condition and swiftly react appropriately. Balanced faults can also be detected by AmpSentry and appropriate acted upon. - Reduces the risk of Arc Flash due to thermal overload or electrical faults by inverse time protection • Generator set monitoring offers status information for all critical prime mover and generator functions • AC and DC digital generator set metering is provided. AC measurements are configurable for single or three phase sensing with PCC3300 measuring voltage, current, kW and kVAr offering a measurement accuracy of 1% • Battery monitoring system continually monitors the battery output and warns of the potential occurrence of a weak battery condition • Relay drivers for prime mover starter, fuel shutoff (FSO), glow plug/spark ignition power and switched B+ applications are provided • Integrated generator set protection is offered to protect the prime mover and generator • Real time clock for fault and event time stamping • Exerciser clock and time of day start/stop initiate a test with or without load, or a Base Load or Peak Shave session • Digital Power Transfer Control (Automatic Mains Failure) provides load transfer operation in open transition, closed transition, or soft (ramping) transfer modes • Extended Paralleling (Peak Shave/Base Load) regulates the genset real and reactive power output while paralleled to the utility. Power can be regulated at either the genset or utility bus monitoring point • Digital frequency synchronization and voltage matching • Isochronous Load Sharing • Droop kW and kVAr Control • The synchronization check function provides adjustments for phase angle window, voltage window, frequency window and time delay • Utility / AC Bus metering and protection with PCC3300 voltage, current, kW and kVAr offering a measurement accuracy of 1% • Advanced serviceability is offered via InPower™, a PC-based software service tool • PCC3300 is designed for reliable operation in harsh environments with the unit itself being a fully encapsulated module • RS-485 ModBus interface for interconnecting to customer equipment • Native on PCC3300: Four discrete inputs, two dry contact relay outputs and two low-side driver outputs are provided and are all configurable. - Optional extra PCC3300 input and output capability available via AUX101 • Warranty and service – Cummins Power Generation offers a comprehensive warranty and worldwide distributor service network • Global regulatory certification and compliance: PCC3300 is suitable for use on gensets that are designed, manufactured, tested and certified to relevant UL, NFPA, ISO, IEC, Mil Std., UKCA and CE standards 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 150 of 234 ©2022 Cummins Inc. | S-1570 (04/22) http://www.cummins.com Base Control Functions HMI capability Options: Local and remote HMI320 options are available Operator adjustments: The HMI320 includes provisions for many set up and adjustment functions. Genset hardware data: Access to the control and software part number, genset rating in kVA and genset model number is provided from the HMI320 or InPower. Data logs: Information concerning all of the following parameters is periodically logged and available for viewing; engine run time, controller on time, number of start attempts, total kilowatt hours, and load profile. (Control logs data indicating the operating hours at percent of rated kW load, in 5% increments. The data is presented on the operation panel based on total operating hours on the generator.) Fault history: Provides a record of the most recent fault conditions with control date and time stamp. Up to 32 events are stored in the control non-volatile memory. Alternator data • Voltage (single or three phase line-to-line and line- to-neutral) • Current (single or three phase) • kW, kVAr, Power Factor, kVA (three phase and total) • Frequency For Lean Burn Natural Gas Engine applications: • Alternator heater status • Alternator winding temperature (per phase) as well as alternator drive end and non-drive end bearing Utility/AC bus data • Voltage (three phase line-to-line and line-to-neutral) • Current (three phase and total) • kW, kVAR, Power Factor, kVA (three phase and total) • Frequency AmpSentry: 3x current regulation for downstream tripping/motor inrush management. Thermal damage curve (3-phase short) or fixed timer (2 sec for 1 -Phase Short or 5 sec for 2-Phase short). Engine data • Starting battery voltage • Engine speed • Engine temperature • Engine oil pressure • Engine oil temperature • Intake manifold temperature • Coolant temperature • Comprehensive Full Authority Engine (FAE) data (where applicable) Lean Burn Natural Gas (LBNG) application parameters include: • Safety shutoff valve status • Valve proving status • Downstream gas pressure • Gas inlet pressure • Gas mass flow rate • Control valve position • Gas outlet pressure • Manifold pressure and temperature • Throttle position • Compressor outlet pressure • Turbo speed • Compressor bypass position • Cylinder configuration (e.g., drive end and non- drive end configurations) • Coolant pressure 1 and 2 as well as coolant temperature 1 and 2 for both HT/LT respectively • Exhaust port temperature (up to 18 cylinders) • Pre-filter oil pressure • Exhaust back pressure • Parent ECM internal temperature and isolated battery voltage • Speed bias • Child ECM internal temperature and isolated battery voltage • Knock level, spark advance, and knock count (for up to 18 cylinders) • Auxiliary supply disconnector status • Engine heater status • Coolant circulating pump status • Lube oil priming pump status • Lube oil status • Oil heater status • Derate authorization status • Start system status • Ventilator fan status • Ventilation louvre status • Radiator fan status • DC PSU status • Start inhibit/enable status and setup Service adjustments – The HMI320 includes provisions for adjustment and calibration of genset control functions. Adjustments are protected by a password. Functions include: • Engine speed governor adjustments • Voltage regulation adjustments • Cycle cranking • Configurable fault set up • Configurable input and output set up • Meter calibration • Paralleling setup • Display language and units of measurement 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 151 of 234 ©2022 Cummins Inc. | S-1570 (04/22) http://www.cummins.com Prime Mover Control SAE-J1939 CAN interface to full authority ECMs (where applicable). Provides data transfer between genset and engine controller for control, metering and diagnostics. 12 V (DC) or 24 V (DC) nominal battery voltage is supported by PCC3300 for normal operation. Temperature dependant prime mover governing dynamics: This function is supported enabling the engine to be responsive when warm and more stable when operating at lower temperature via providing control and modification over electronic governing parameters as a function of engine temperature. Isochronous governing is provided in order to control prime mover speed within ±0.25% of nominal rated speed for any steady state load from no load to full load. During operation frequency drift should not exceed ±0.5% of nominal frequency given a 33ºC (or 60ºF) chance in ambient temperature within an eight- hour period. Droop electronic speed is governing capability is natively offered by PCC3300 to permit droop from 0% to 10% between no load to full load. Remote start capability is built into the PCC3300 as the unit accepts a ground signal from remote devices to automatically command the starting of the generator set as well as the reaching of rated speed, voltage and frequency or otherwise run at idle speed until prime mover temperature is adequate. The presence of a remote start signal shall cause the PCC3300 to leave sleep mode and return to normal power mode. PCC3300 supports an option for delayed start or stop. Remote Start Integrity: In compliance with NEC2017 Start Signal Integrity standard – NFPA70 Article 700.10(D)(3), the remote start circuit from ATS to PCC3300 is continuously monitored for signal disturbance due to broken, disconnected or shorted wires via a configurable input. Loss of signal integrity results in activation of a remote start signal. Remote and local emergency stopping capability: PCC3300 accepts ground signal from a locally or remoted mounted emergency stop switch to cause the generator set to immediately shutdown. The generator set is prevented from either running or cranking with the emergency stop switch engaged. If PCC3300 is in sleep mode, then the activation of any emergency stop switch shall return PCC3300 is normal powered state along with the activation of the corresponding shutdown and run-prevention states. Sleep mode: PowerCommand 3.3 supports a configurable low current draw state, which is design with consideration to the needs of prime applications or others application without a battery charger (in order to minimize battery current drain). Automatic prime mover starting: Any generator set controlled by PCC3300 is capable of automatic starting achieved via either magnetic pickup or main alternator output frequency. PCC3300 additionally supports configurable glow plug control where applicable. Prime mover cycle cranking: PCC3300 supports configurable starting cycles and rest periods. Built in starter protection are incorporated to prevent the operator from specifying a starting sequence that may be damaging. Configurable time delay functionality: PCC3300 supports time delayed generator set starting and stopping (for cooldown). Permissible time delays are as follows (noting a default setting is 0 seconds): 1. Start delay: 0 seconds to 300 seconds prior to starting after receiving a remote start signal. 2. Stop delay: 0 seconds to 600 seconds prior to shut down after receiving a signal to stop in normal operation modes. Lean Burn Natural Gas application specific parameters PCC3300 supports prime mover inhibiting in order to permit application-specific processes (i.e. Auxiliaries) to be started first. Generator Control PCC3300 performs both Genset voltage sensing and Genset voltage regulation as follows: • Voltage sensing is integrated into PCC3300 via three phase line-to-line sensing that is compatible with shunt or PMG excitation systems • Automatic voltage regulation is accomplished by using a three phase fully rectified input and has a FET output for good motor starting capability. Major features of generator control include: Digital output voltage regulation - Capable of regulating output voltage to within +/-1.0% for any loads between no load and full load. Voltage drift will not exceed +/- 1.5% for a 40 ºC (104 ºF) change in temperature in an eight-hour period. On engine starting or sudden load acceptance, voltage is controlled to a maximum of 5% overshoot over nominal level. The automatic voltage regulator feature can be disabled to allow the use of an external voltage regulator. Droop voltage regulation - Control can be adjusted to droop from 0-10% from no load to full load. Torque-matched V/Hz overload control - The voltage roll-off set point and rate of decay (i.e. the slope of the V/Hz curve) is adjustable in the control. Fault current regulation - PowerCommand® will regulate the output current on any phase to a maximum of three times rated current under fault conditions for both single phase and three phase faults. In conjunction with a permanent magnet generator, it will provide three times rated current on all phases for motor starting and short circuit coordination purpose. Cylinder Cut-off System (CCS): PCC 3300 supports Cylinder Cut-off System which is used to operate the engines on half bank at no load and light load conditions. CCS has below benefits on engine 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 152 of 234 ©2022 Cummins Inc. | S-1570 (04/22) http://www.cummins.com performance- improved emission standards, improved fuel efficiency, reduced hydrocarbons, reduced white smoke, reduced wet stacking and higher exhaust temperature at light loads to improve turbocharger operations and catalyst performance. Step Timing Control (STC): PCC 3300 supports STC functionality which is used to advance the engine timing of a hydro-mechanical engine during start up and light load conditions. During ADVANCED injection timing, it: • Improves cold weather idling characteristics • Reduces cold weather white smoke • Improves light load fuel economy • Reduces injector carboning Paralleling Functions First Start SensorTM system – PowerCommand® provides a unique control function that positively prevents multiple gensets from simultaneously closing to an isolated bus under black start conditions. The First Start Sensor system is a communication system between the gensets that allows the gensets to work together to determine which genset is a system should be the first to close to the bus. The system includes an independent backup function, so that if the primary system is disabled the required functions are still performed. Synchronizing – Control incorporates a digital synchronizing function to force the genset to match the frequency, phase and voltage of another source such as a utility grid. The synchronizer includes provisions to provide proper operation even with highly distorted bus voltage waveforms. The synchronizer can match other sources over a range of 60-110% of nominal voltage and -24 to +6 hertz. The synchronizer function is configurable for slip frequency synchronizing for applications requiring a known direction of power flow at instant of breaker closure or for applications where phase synchronization performance is otherwise inadequate. Load sharing control – The genset control includes an integrated load sharing control system for both real (kW) and reactive (kVar) loads when the genset(s) are operating on an isolated bus. The control system determines kW load on the engine and kVar load on the alternator as a percent of genset capacity, and then regulates fuel and excitation systems to maintain system and genset at the same percent of load without impacting voltage or frequency regulation. The control can also be configured for operation in droop mode for kW or Kvar load sharing. Load govern control– When PowerCommand® receives a signal indicating that the genset is paralleled with an infinite source such as a utility (mains) service, the genset will operate in load govern mode. In this mode the genset will synchronize and close to the bus, ramp to a pre-programmed kW and kVar load level, and then operate at that point. Control is adjustable for kW values from 0-100% of standby rating, and 0.7-1.0 power factor (lagging). Default setting is 80% of standby and 1.0 power factor. The control includes inputs to allow independent control of kW and kVar load level by a remote device while in the load govern mode. The rate of load increase and decrease is also adjustable in the control. In addition, the control can be configured for operation in kW or kVAR load govern droop. Load demand control – The control system includes the ability to respond to an external signal to initiate load demand operation. On command, the genset will ramp to no load, open its paralleling breaker, cool down, and shut down. On removal of the command, the genset will immediately start, synchronize, connect, and ramp to its share of the total load on the system. Sync check – The sync check function decides when permissive conditions have been met to allow breaker closure. Adjustable criteria are: phase difference from 0.1-20 deg, frequency difference from 0.001-1.0 Hz, voltage difference from 0.5-10%, and a dwell time from 0.5-5.0 sec. Internally the sync check is used to perform closed transition operations. An external sync check output is also available. Genset and utility/AC bus source AC metering – The control provides comprehensive three phase AC metering functions for both monitored sources, including: 3-phase voltage (L-L and L-N) and current, frequency, phase rotation, individual phase and totalized values of kW, kVAR, kVA and Power Factor; totalized positive and negative kW-hours, kVAR-hours, and kVA-hours. Three wire or four wire voltage connection with direct sensing of voltages to 600V, and up to 45kV with external transformers. Current sensing is accomplished with either 5 amp or 1 CT secondaries and with up to 10,000 amp primary. Maximum power readings are 32,000kW/kVAR/kVA. Power transfer control – provides integrated automatic power transfer functions including source availability sensing, genset start/stop and transfer pair monitoring and control. The transfer/retransfer is configurable for open transition, fast closed transition (less than 100msec interconnect time), or soft closed transition (load ramping) sequences of operation. Utility source failure will automatically start genset and transfer load, retransferring when utility source returns. Test will start gensets and transfer load if test with load is enabled. Sensors and timers include: Under voltage sensor: 3-phase L-N or L-L under voltage sensing adjustable for pickup from 85-100% of nominal. Dropout adjustable from 75-98% of pickup. Dropout delay adjustable from 0.1-30 sec. Over voltage sensor: 3-phase L-N or L-L over voltage sensing adjustable for pickup from 95-99% of dropout. Dropout adjustable from 105-135% of nominal. Dropout delay adjustable from 0.5-120 sec. Standard configuration is disabled and is configurable to enabled in the field using the HMI or InPower service tools. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 153 of 234 ©2022 Cummins Inc. | S-1570 (04/22) http://www.cummins.com Over/Under frequency sensor: Center frequency adjustable from 45-65 Hz. Dropout bandwidth adjustable from 0.3-5% of center frequency beyond pickup bandwidth. Pickup bandwidth adjustable from 0.3-20% of center frequency. Field configurable to enable. Loss of phase sensor: Detects out of range voltage phase angle relationship. Field configurable to enable. Phase rotation sensor: Checks for valid phase rotation of source. Field configurable to enable. Breaker tripped: If the breaker tripped input is active, the associated source will be considered as unavailable. Timers: Control provides adjustable start delay from 0 - 300sec, stop delay from 0 - 800sec, transfer delay from 0-120sec, retransfer delay from 0-1800sec, programmed transition delay from 0-60sec, and maximum parallel time from 0-1800sec. Negative Sequence Current Protection: PCC3300 supports this protection natively in order to determine if the generator is at any point was running subject to negative phase sequencing. Breaker control – Utility and Genset breaker interfaces include separate relays for opening and closing breaker, as well as inputs for both 'a' and 'b' breaker position contacts and tripped status. Breaker diagnostics include Contact Failure, Fail to Close, Fail to Open, Fail to Disconnect, and Tripped. Upon breaker failure, appropriate control action is taken to maintain system integrity. Exerciser clock –The exerciser clock (when enabled) allows the system to be operated at preset times in either test without load, test with load, or extended parallel mode. A Real Time Clock is built in. Up to 12 different programs can be set for day of week, time of day, duration, repeat interval, and mode. For example, a test with load for 1 hour every Tuesday at 2AM can be programmed. Up to 6 different exceptions can also be set up to block a program from running during a specific date and time period. Extended paralleling – In extended paralleling mode (when enabled) the controller will start the genset and parallel to a utility source and then govern the real and reactive power output of the genset based on the desired control point. The control point for the real power (kW) can be configured for either the genset metering point ("Base Load") or the utility metering point ("Peak Shave"). The control point for the reactive power (kVAR or Power Factor) can also be independently configured for either the genset metering point or the utility metering point. This flexibility would allow base kW load from the genset while maintaining the utility power factor at a reasonable value to avoid penalties due to low power factor. The System always operates within genset ratings. The control point can be changed while the system is in operation. Set points can be adjusted via hardwired analog input or adjusted through an operator panel display or service tool. Application types – Controller is configured to operating in one of six possible application types. These topologies are often used in combinations in larger systems, with coordination of the controllers in the system either by external device or by interlocks provided in the control. Topologies that may be selected in the control include: Standalone: Control provides monitoring, protection and control in a non-paralleling application. G PCC 3300 Synchronizer only: control will synchronize the genset to other source when commanded to either via a hardwired or Modbus driven input. G PCC 3300Source X Sync Check Sync Enable Isolated Bus: allows the genset to perform a dead bus closure or synchronize to the bus and isochronously share kW and kVAR loads with other gensets. G PCC 3300 G PCC 3xxx G PCC 3xxx Load share lines 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 154 of 234 ©2022 Cummins Inc. | S-1570 (04/22) http://www.cummins.com Utility Single: Control monitors one genset and utility. The control will automatically start and provide power to a load if the utility fails. The control will also resynchronize the genset back to the utility and provides extended paralleling capabilities. G PCC 3300 Position Only Utility Multiple: Supports all functionality of Isolated Bus and provides extended paralleling to the utility. Extended paralleling load set points follow a constant setting; dynamically follow an analog input, Modbus register or HMI. G PCC 3300 G PCC 3xxx G PCC 3xxx Load share lines & Ut i l i t y P a r a l l e l E n a b l e Power Transfer Control: Control operates a single genset/single utility transfer pair in open transition, fast closed transition, or soft closed transition. Extended paralleling functionality also provides base load and peak shave options. G PCC 3300 Masterless Load Demand (Optional Feature): PowerCommand® 3.3 with Masterless Load Demand (MLD) technology enables generator sets to start/stop automatically based on load demand. Masterless Load Demand-capable generators are equipped with an additional s-CAN network connection that allows sharing of information amongst paralleled generator sets. MLD has been designed for hassle-free installation, commissioning and operation. MLD functionality. Integrated on-board system logic provides the MLD topology control without the need for any additional system. PCC3300 External Voltage and Frequency Biasing Inputs PCC3300 supports externally driven voltage and frequency biasing capability in order to permit external paralleling (if intending to use this feature please contact your local distributor for further information). 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 155 of 234 ©2022 Cummins Inc. | S-1570 (04/22) http://www.cummins.com Protective Functions On operation of a protective function the control will indicate a fault by illuminating the appropriate status LED on the HMI, as well as display the fault code and fault description on the LCD. The nature of the fault and time of occurrence are logged in the control. The service manual and InPower service tool provide service keys and procedures based on the service codes provided. Protective functions include: Battle short mode When enabled and the battle short switch is active, the control will allow some shutdown faults to be bypassed. If a bypassed shutdown fault occurs, the fault code and description will still be annunciated, but the genset will not shutdown. This will be followed by a fail to shutdown fault. Emergency stop shutdowns and others that are critical for proper operation (or are handled by the engine ECM) are not bypassed. Please refer to the Control Application Guide or Manual for list of these faults. Derate The Derate function reduces output power of the genset in response to a fault condition. If a Derate command occurs while operating on an isolated bus, the control will issue commands to reduce the load on the genset via contact closures or Modbus. If a Derate command occurs while in utility parallel mode, the control will actively reduce power by lowering the base load kW to the derated target kW. Configurable alarm and status inputs The control accepts up to four alarm or status inputs (configurable contact closed to ground or open) to indicate a configurable (customer-specified) condition. The control is programmable for warning, derate, shutdown, shutdown with cooldown or status indication and for labeling the input. Emergency stop Annunciated whenever either emergency stop signal is received from external switch. General prime mover protection Low and high battery voltage warning - Indicates status of battery charging system (failure) by continuously monitoring battery voltage. Weak battery warning - The control system will test the battery each time the genset is signaled to start and indicate a warning if the battery indicates impending failure. Low coolant level warning – Can be set up to be a warning or shutdown. Low coolant temperature warning – Indicates that engine temperature may not be high enough for a 10 second start or proper load acceptance. Fail to start (overcrank) shutdown - The control system will indicate a fault if the genset fails to start by the completion of the engine crack sequence. Fail to crank shutdown - Control has signaled starter to crank engine but engine does not rotate. Cranking lockout - The control will not allow the starter to attempt to engage or to crank the engine when the engine is rotating. Fault simulation –The control in conjunction with InPower software, will accept commands to allow a technician to verify the proper operation of the control and its interface by simulating failure modes or by forcing the control to operate outside of its normal operating ranges. InPower also provides a complete list of faults and settings for the protective functions provided by the controller. For Lean Burn Natural Gas Engine applications: Off load running (protection) – This feature protects the engine in the event the genset is being called to go off load for too long. Hydro Mechanical fuel system engine protection: Overspeed shutdown – Default setting is 115% of nominal Low lube oil pressure warning/shutdown – Level is preset (configurable with InPower or HMI) to match the capabilities of the engine used. Control includes time delays to prevent nuisance alarms. High lube oil temperature warning/shutdown – Level is preset (configurable with InPower or HMI) to match the capabilities of the engine used. Control includes time delays to prevent nuisance alarms. High engine temperature warning/shutdown – Level is preset (configurable with InPower or HMI) to match the capabilities of the engine used. Control includes time delays to prevent nuisance alarms. Low coolant temperature warning – Indicates that engine temperature may not be high enough for a 10 second start or proper load acceptance. High intake manifold temperature shutdown – Level is preset (configurable with InPower or HMI) to match the capabilities of the engine used. Control includes time delays to prevent nuisance alarms. Full authority electronic engine protection: Engine fault detection is handled inside the engine ECM. Fault information is communicated via the SAE- J1939 data link for annunciation in the HMI. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 156 of 234 ©2022 Cummins Inc. | S-1570 (04/22) http://www.cummins.com Alternator Protection AmpSentry protective relay - A comprehensive monitoring and control system integral to the PowerCommand® Control System that guards the electrical integrity of the alternator and power system by providing protection against a wide array of fault conditions in the genset or in the load. It also provides single and three phase fault current regulation (3x Current) so that downstream protective devices have the maximum current available to quickly clear fault conditions without subjecting the alternator to potentially catastrophic failure conditions. Thermal damage curve (3 phase short) or fixed timer (2sec for 1P short, 5sec for 2P short). See document R1053 for a full-size time over current curve. The control does not included protection required for interconnection to a utility (mains) service. AmpSentry Maintenance Mode (AMM) - Instantaneous tripping, if AmpSentry Maintenance mode is active (50mS response to turn off AVR excitation/shutdown genset) for arc flash reduction when personnel are near genset. High AC voltage shutdown (59) - Output voltage on any phase exceeds preset values. Time to trip is inversely proportional to amount above threshold. Values adjustable from 105-125% of nominal voltage, with time delay adjustable from 0.1-10 seconds. Default value is 110% for 10 seconds. Low AC voltage shutdown (27) - Voltage on any phase has dropped below a preset value. Adjustable over a range of 50-95% of reference voltage, time delay 2-20 seconds. Default value is 85% for 10 seconds. Function tracks reference voltage. Control does not nuisance trip when voltage varies due to the control directing voltage to drop, such as during a V/Hz roll -off or synchronizing. Under frequency shutdown (81 u) - Genset output frequency cannot be maintained. Settings are adjustable from 2-10 Hz below reference governor set point, for a 5-20 second time delay. Default: 6 Hz, 10 seconds. Under frequency protection is disabled when excitation is switched off, such as when engine is operating in idle speed mode. Over frequency shutdown/warning (81o) - Genset is operating at a potentially damaging frequency level. Settings are adjustable from 2-10 Hz above nominal governor set point for a 1-20 second time delay. Default: 6 Hz, 20 seconds, disabled. Overcurrent warning/shutdown (51) - Implementation of the thermal damage curve with instantaneous trip level calculated based on current transformer ratio and application power rating. Loss of sensing voltage shutdown - Shutdown of genset will occur on loss of voltage sensing inputs to the control. Field overload shutdown - Monitors field voltage to shutdown genset when a field overload condition occurs. Over load (kW) warning - Provides a warning indication when engine is operating at a load level over a set point. Adjustment range: 80-140% of application rated kW, 0-120 second delay. Defaults: 105%, 60 seconds. Reverse power shutdown (32) - Adjustment range: 5- 20% of standby kW rating, delay 1-15 seconds. Default: 10%, 3 seconds. Reverse Var shutdown (40) - Shutdown level is adjustable: 15-50% of rated Var output, delay 10-60 seconds. Default: 20%, 10 seconds. Short circuit protection - Output current on any phase is more than 175% of rating and approaching the thermal damage point of the alternator. Control includes algorithms to protect alternator from repeated over current conditions over a short period of time. Negative sequence overcurrent warning (46) – Control protects the generator from damage due to excessive imbalances in the three phase load currents and/or power factors. Custom overcurrent warning/shutdown (51) – Control provides the ability to have a custom time overcurrent protection curve in addition to the AmpSentry protective relay function. Ground fault overcurrent (51G) – Control detects a ground fault either by an external ground fault relay via a contact input or the control can measure the ground current from an external current transformer. Associated time delays and thresholds are adjustable via InPower or HMI. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 157 of 234 ©2022 Cummins Inc. | S-1570 (04/22) http://www.cummins.com Paralleling Protection Breaker fail to close Warning: When the control signals a circuit breaker to close, it will monitor the breaker auxiliary contacts and verify that the breaker has closed. If the control does not sense a breaker closure within an adjustable time period after the close signal, the fail to close warning will be initiated. Breaker fail to open warning: The control system monitors the operation of breakers that have been signaled to open. If the breaker does not open within and adjustable time delay, a Breaker Fail to Open warning is initiated. Breaker position contact warning: The controller will monitor both ‘a’ and ‘b’ position contacts from the breaker. If the contacts disagree as to the breaker position, the breaker position contact warning will be initiated. Breaker tripped warning: The control accepts inputs to monitor breaker trip / bell alarm contact and will initiate a breaker tripped warning if it should activate. Fail to disconnect warning: In the controller is unable to open either breaker, a fail to disconnect warning is initiated. Typically, this would be mapped to a configurable output, allowing an external device to trip a breaker. Fail to synchronize warning: Indicates that the genset could not be brought to synchronization with the bus. Configurable for adjustable time delay of 10 -900 seconds, 120 default. Phase sequence sensing warning: Verifies that the genset phase sequence matches the bus prior to allowing the paralleling breaker to close. Maximum parallel time warning (power transfer control mode only): During closed transition load transfers, control independently monitors paralleled time. If time is exceeded, warning is initiated and genset is disconnected. Bus or genset PT input calibration warning: The control system monitors the sensed voltage from the bus and genset output voltage potential transformers. When the paralleling breaker is closed, it will indicate a warning condition if the read values are different. Field Control Interface Input signals to the PowerCommand® control include: - Coolant level (where applicable) - Fuel level (where applicable) - Remote emergency stop - Remote fault reset - Remote start - Rupture basin - Start type signal - Battle short - Load demand stop - Synchronize enable - Genset circuit breaker inhibit - Utility circuit breaker inhibit - Single mode verify - Transfer inhibit – prevent transfer to utility (in power transfer control mode) - Retransfer inhibit – prevent retransfer to genset (in power transfer control mode) - kW and kVAR load setpoints Configurable inputs - Control includes (4) input signals from customer discrete devices that are configurable for warning, shutdown or status indication, as well as message displayed Input signals for Lean Burn Natural Gas Engine applications: - Gearbox oil pressure/temperature protection - Fire fault - Earth fault support as a discrete input via an appropriate secondary detection device - Differential fault - DC power supply fault - Genset Interface Box (GIB) isolator open fault - Start inhibit/enable (x3) - Radiator fan trip - Ventilator fan trip - Ventilation louvers closed - Start system trip - Alternator heater trip - Alternator heater status - Alternator winding temperature (PT100 RTDx3) - Alternator drive end bearing temperature (PT100 RTD) - Alternator non-drive end bearing temperature (PT100 RTD) Output signals from the PowerCommand® control include: - Load dump signal: Operates when the genset is in an overload condition. - Delayed off signal: Time delay-based output which will continue to remain active after the control has removed the run command. Adjustment range: 0 - 120 seconds. Default: 0 seconds. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 158 of 234 ©2022 Cummins Inc. | S-1570 (04/22) http://www.cummins.com - Configurable relay outputs: Control includes (4) relay output contacts (3 A, 30VDC). These outputs can be configured to activate on any control warning or shutdown fault as well as ready to load, not in auto, common alarm, common warning and common shutdown. - Ready to load (genset running) signal: Operates when the genset has reached 90% of rated speed and voltage and latches until genset is switched to off or idle mode. - Paralleling circuit breaker relays outputs: Control includes (4) relay output contacts (3.5A, 30 VDC) for opening and closing of the genset and utility breakers. Output Signals for Lean Burn Natural Gas Engine applications: - Start inhibit/enable event - Emergency stop event - Ventilator fan run control - Louvre control - Radiator fan control - Alternator heater control - Engine at idle speed event Communications connections include: - PC tool interface: This RS-485 communication port allows the control to communicate with a personal computer running InPower software. - Modbus RS-485 port: Allows the control to communicate with external devices such as PLCs using Modbus protocol. Note - An RS-232 or USB to RS-485 converter is required for communication between PC and control. - Networking: This RS-485 communication port allows connection from the control to the other Cummins Power Generation products. Mechanical Drawing 255.5 (10.06) 198.5 (7.85) 69.5 (2.74) Control Board 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 159 of 234 ©2022 Cummins Inc. | S-1570 (04/22) http://www.cummins.com PowerCommand® Human Machine Interface HMI320 Description This control system includes an intuitive operator interface panel that allows for complete genset control as well as system metering, fault annunciation, configuration and diagnostics. The interface includes five genset status LED lamps with both internationally accepted symbols and English text to comply with customer’s needs. The interface also includes an LED backlit LCD display with tactile feel soft-switches for easy operation and screen navigation. It is configurable for units of measurement and has adjustable screen contrast and brightness. The run/off/auto switch function is integrated into the interface panel. All data on the control can be viewed by scrolling through screens with the navigation keys. The control displays the current active fault and a time-ordered history of the five previous faults. Features: • LED indicating lamps - genset running - remote start - not in auto - shutdown - warning - auto - manual and stop - Circuit breaker open (if equipped) - Circuit breaker closed (if equipped) • 320 x 240 pixels graphic LED backlight LCD. • Four tactile feel membrane switches for LCD defined operation. The functions of these switches are defined dynamically on the LCD. • Seven tactile feel membrane switches dedicated screen navigation buttons for up, down, left, right, ok, home and cancel. • Six tactile feel membrane switches dedicated to control for auto, stop, manual, manual start, fault reset and lamp test/panel lamps. • Two tactile feel membrane switches dedicated to control of circuit breaker (where applicable). • Allows for complete genset control setup. • Certifications: Suitable for use on gensets that are designed, manufactured, tested and certified to relevant UL, NFPA, ISO, IEC, Mil Std., UKCA and CE standards. • Languages supported: English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, Greek, Portuguese, Finnish, Norwegian, Danish, Russian (Cyrillic), Chinese, Hungarian, Japanese, Polish, Korean, Romanian, Brazilian Portuguese, Turkish, Dutch, and Czech Communications connections include: - PC tool interface - This RS-485 communication port allows the HMI to communicate with a personal computer running InPower. - This RS-485 communication port allows the HMI to communicate with the main control board. Mechanical Drawing 299.6 (11.8) 234.6 (9.24) 38.75 (1.53) HMI Dimensions: mm (inches) Software InPower (beyond 6.5 version) is a PC-based software service tool that is designed to directly communicate to PowerCommand® gensets and transfer switches, to facilitate service and monitoring of these products. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 160 of 234 ©2022 Cummins Inc. | S-1570 (04/22) http://www.cummins.com Environment The control is designed for proper operation without recalibration in ambient temperatures from -40 ºC (-40 ºF) to +70º C (158 ºF), and for storage from -55 ºC (-67 ºF) to +80 ºC (176 ºF). Control will operate with humidity up to 95%, non-condensing. The HMI is designed for proper operation in ambient temperatures from -20 ºC (-4 ºF) to +70 ºC (158 ºF), and for storage from -30 ºC (-22 ºF) to +80 ºC (176 ºF). The control board is fully encapsulated to provide superior resistance to dust and moisture. Display panel has a single membrane surface, which is impervious to effects of dust, moisture, oil and exhaust fumes. This panel uses a sealed membrane to provide long reliable service life in harsh environments. The control system is specifically designed and tested for resistance to RFI/EMI and to resist effects of vibration to provide a long reliable life when mounted on a genset. The control includes transient voltage surge suppression to provide compliance to referenced standards. Certifications PowerCommand® meets or exceeds the requirements of the following codes and standards: - NFPA 110 for level 1 and 2 systems. - ISO 8528-4:2005 compliance, controls and switchgear (second edition) - CE marking: The CE marking is only valid when equipment is used in a fixed installation application. Material compliance declaration is available upon request. - UKCA marking- The UKCA marking is only valid when equipment is used in a fixed installation application. Material compliance declaration is available upon request. - EN 50081-1,2 residential/light industrial emissions or industrial emissions. - EN 50082-1,2 residential/light industrial or industrial susceptibility. - ISO 7637-2, level 2; DC supply surge voltage test. - Mil Std 202C, Method 101 and ASTM B117: Salt fog test. - UL 6200 recognized, suitable for use on UL 2200 Listed generator sets. - CSA C282-M1999 compliance - CSA 22.2 No. 14 M91 industrial controls. - PowerCommand® control systems and generator sets are designed and manufactured in ISO 9001 certified facilities. - ROHS (Restriction of Hazardous substance) complaint both for HMI 320 & PCC3300v2. Reference Documents Please refer to the following reference documents available in the PowerSuite library: • PowerCommand™ 3.3. Application Guide • T-037: PowerCommand Control Application Manual (ANSI Protective Functions) • T-040: PowerCommand 3.3 Paralleling Application Guide Please refer to the following reference documents available on Cummins Quickserve: • Service Manuals for PC3.3 (non-MLD) and PC3.3 (MLD) • Modbus Register Mapping Warranty All components and subsystems are covered by an express limited one-year warranty. Other optional and extended factory warranties and local distributor maintenance agreements are available. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 161 of 234 power.cummins.com ©2019 Cummins Inc. | S-1642-EN | PDA059Y505 (12/19) Specification Sheet PowerCommand® 500/550 Remote Monitoring System Complete remote monitoring of your power system Overview The PowerCommand 500 series provides a convenient means of remotely monitoring generator sets, transfer switches, sensors and output controls. Users can access the remote monitoring device from any PC or Mac computer using a Microsoft Silverlight-enabled web browser; no additional software is required. Multiple users can monitor the power system equipment simultaneously. PowerCommand 500 series users can monitor generator set data, such as annunciator, alternator and engine data, as well as transfer switch data, such as source, load and switch connection status. Expandable I/O modules can provide additional monitoring and controlling capabilities. Product Highlights ▪ Real-time Site and Asset Monitoring ▪ Intuitive Graphical user interface with multi- language support ▪ Fault & Event Notification ▪ Remote Control Capability of Asset ▪ Secure Data Transmission utilizing 128-bit SSL encryption. ▪ Product Certification: cUL, FCC and ICES- 003B coordinate location with Owner 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 162 of 234 power.cummins.com ©2019 Cummins Inc. | S-1642-EN | PDA059Y505 (12/19) Product Features ▪ Communication: The PowerCommand 500/550 interfaces with Cummins® controls (generator sets, transfer switches and expandable I/O modules) via Modbus TM. Legacy controls will require a LonWorksTM to Modbus converter (PowerCommand Lon Gateway). ▪ Monitoring: PowerCommand 550 monitors up to twelve devices in any combination of generator sets, transfer switches and up to three expandable I/O modules. PowerCommand 500 monitors up to two devices in any combination of generator sets, transfer switches or expandable I/O modules. ▪ Asset Control: User can remotely start and stop generator sets; remotely start and stop transfer switch tests; and remotely reset and acknowledge warning type faults on generator sets and transfer switches. User can also remotely activate and deactivate output controls. ▪ Notification: When an event becomes active, the user can choose to receive notifications via SMTP (email) and SNMP traps. ▪ User Interface: PowerCommand 500/550 employs a straightforward, icon-based graphical interface for monitoring data and controlling devices. ▪ Data Logging: PowerCommand 500/550 data logs contain detailed device data such as alternator, engine, source and load values. The user can extend data log memory with either an SD memory card or a USB flash drive. With the PowerCommand 550, a user can export data logs. ▪ Event Storage: PowerCommand 500/550 stores system and device events, which include faults and warnings triggered on generator sets, transfer switches, sensors and PowerCommand 500/550. With the PowerCommand 550, a user can export event logs. ▪ Reports: Users can create and view device reports containing selected parameters over a specified time duration. With the PowerCommand 550, a user can export these customized reports. ▪ Diagnostics: Users can remotely diagnose Modbus communication status, wireless status and system performance data. ▪ Security: PowerCommand 500/550 has enhanced security with 128-bit Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) encryption. The system is username and password protected. Users are assigned one of three access levels – Administrator, Operator, Read-Only – providing various operation and functionality at each access level. Product Description: PowerCommand 500/550 enables remote monitoring of Cummins and third-party equipment, including generator sets, transfer switches and sensors and output controls. Connectivity and Notifications The PowerCommand 500/550 communicates to controls using Modbus RTU communication protocol through two RS485 channels on the device. All Cummins generator set controls using Modbus can be directly connected, while Cummins generator set and transfer switch controls using PowerCommand LonWorks can communicate via a PowerCommand ModLon II Gateway LonWorks to Modbus converter. The PowerCommand 500/550 is connected to a TCP/IP network through the Ethernet connection. This allows the user to access the web-based user interface, login and view the overall status of the power system over the network. The user can receive notifications via SMTP (e-mail) and SNMP traps. Home Home Page allows the user to view the status of all configured devices in one glance. The Home Page provides an overall system status of all configured devices. Within each configured generator set, there are icons which provide fault, run and communication status. Within each configured transfer switch, there are icons which provide fault, switch position, source availability and communication status. The Home Page also allows the user to create graphs for a particular device by selecting a parameter and a pre-configured duration. The Menu Bar allows for intuitive and efficient navigation among devices, system event log, reports, diagnostics and setup. The Systems Status Bar continuously displays active events associated with the configured power system. The Menu and System Status bars are viewable on all pages as the user navigates throughout the user interface 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 163 of 234 power.cummins.com ©2019 Cummins Inc. | S-1642-EN | PDA059Y505 (12/19) Setup Setup Page enables configuration of the device and the network through easy-to-use guided wizards. The Setup Page has several tiles that allow the user to easily configure their power system for remote monitoring. Using simple wizards, the user can configure the network settings, devices, data log preferences, user profiles, notifications, date/time, and mail settings. Adding to this convenience is the ability to update the PowerCommand 500/550’s software. Once the user has saved the updated software file to their personal computer, the software update process can be easily executed remotely through the user interface. Generator Set Data Clicking on the Home Page generator set icon navigates the user to the details page, providing a snapshot of the annunciator, alternator and engine data. By selecting any configured generator set on the Home Page, the user can view all the commonly used parameters usually accessed through the human machine interface (HMI) or annunciator panel. The display data is shown on three different panels: Annunciator, Alternator and Engine. The annunciator panel displays extended annunciator parameters; whereas, the Alternator and Engine panels display electrical and engine parameters respectively. Within this configured generator set detailed view, the user is also able to view event logs, data logs and gauges associated with that particular generator set. The generator set data page also allows the user to start or stop a generator set with the Start and Stop buttons. Additionally, the user can reset the warning type faults associated with that particular generator set with the Fault Reset button Transfer Switch Data Clicking on the Home Page transfer switch icon navigates the user to the details page, providing a snapshot of annunciator, load and source status data. By selecting any configured transfer switch on the Home Page, the user can view all the commonly used parameters. The data is displayed using panels, such as Annunciator, Load and Source Status. Similar to the generator set data, the user can access specific event and data logs associated with that configured transfer switch. The transfer switch details page also displays the Source Status visually, while the Start and Stop buttons allow the user to remotely test the transfer switch. Additionally, the user can reset the warning type faults associated with that particular transfer switch with the Fault Reset button. Sensors and Output Controls Data Clicking on the Home Page building icon navigates the user to the details page, providing a snapshot of all configured sensors or output controls. By selecting the Building icon on the Home Page, the user can view all configured sensors and output controls. In addition to device specific I/Os, the user can add an AUX 101 (8-configurable inputs and 8-discrete outputs) and an AUX 102 (4-non-configurable discrete inputs and 8-discrete outputs) for additional remote monitoring and controlling capability. The Sensors and Output Controls Page displays configured sensors (states/values, low warnings and high warnings) and output controls (statuses and states). The user can remotely activate and deactivate output control states by clicking the off/on switch. Similar to the generator set and transfer switch data, the user can access specific event logs associated with all configured sensors. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 164 of 234 power.cummins.com ©2019 Cummins Inc. | S-1642-EN | PDA059Y505 (12/19) Certification ICES-003B Dimensions Dimensions are millimeters (inches) 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 165 of 234 power.cummins.com ©2019 Cummins Inc. | S-1642-EN | PDA059Y505 (12/19) System Requirements Communication Configuration • PC or Macintosh computer • Browser: Internet Explorer, version 9.0 or later, Google Chrome, Firefox, Safari • Operating System: Microsoft Windows®, Mac OS X or Linux • HTML5 Support • Windows Mobile Device Center • Minimum screen resolution, 1024 x 768 • Network: 10/100-megabit Ethernet for the primary physical connection Languages The user interface is available in the following languages: English, Brazilian Portuguese, French and Spanish Hardware Requirements For installation and communication, the following additional hardware may be required: • Secure Digital (SD) memory card • USB 2.0 flash drive • Modbus Cable • PowerCommand Input/Output AUX 101 Module • PowerCommand Input/Output AUX102 Expansion Module Power Supply Requirements The use of a power supply, with the following specification, is recommended. It is also recommended to connect the power supply and PowerCommand 500/550 to an uninterruptible power supply (UPS). Voltage Range 12 to 24VDC Current (12V typical) 250mA Current (24V typical) 125mA Power (typical) 3.0W Power (Maximum) 5.0W Environment Operating Temperature -20°C to 70°C (-4°F to 158°F) Storage Temperature -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 185°F) Humidity 85% RH, non-condensing Mounting and Installation PowerCommand 550/500 is DIN rail mountable and should be installed in a location suitable for telecommunications, information technology or networking equipment. LonWorks Controls Required hardware for LonWorks-based controls: PCC2100, 3100, 3200 and 3201 generator set controls and OTPC, BTPC, OHPC and CHPC transfer switch controls: • PowerCommand ModLon II Gateway LonWorks to Modbus Converter • PowerCommand Network Communications Module (NCM) • ModLon Connection Cable Note: Additional hardware required for non- communicating OTEC, GTEC or third-party transfer switch controls and third-party generator set controls. • PowerCommand ModLon II Gateway LonWorks to Modbus Converter • PowerCommand Network Communication Module (CCM-G) • PowerCommand Control Communication Module (CCM-T) • PowerCommand Input/Output AUX 101 Module • PowerCommand Input/Output AUX 102 Expansion Module Modbus Controls There is no additional hardware required for Modbus controls: PCC1301, 1302, 2300 and 3300. Modbus Communications A shielded twisted pair cable, Belden 9729 cable or equivalent, is recommended for Modbus communication between the PowerCommand 500/550 and any configured devices. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 166 of 234 For more information contact your local Cummins distributor or visit power.cummins.com ©2019 Cummins Inc. All rights reserved. Cummins is a registered trademark of Cummins Inc. PowerCommand, AmpSentry, InPower and “Our energy working for you.” are trademarks of Cummins Inc. Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. Specifications are subject to change without notice. S-1642-EN | PDA059Y505 (12/19) Standard Product Contents Accessories • PowerCommand 500 or 550 LN • USB On-The-Go (OTG) cable • Ethernet cable • Quick Start Guide • Quick Troubleshooting Guide • Warranty Statement • USB containing Owner’s Manual, Quick Start Guide, Quick Troubleshooting Guide and Warranty Statement in multiple languages  0541-1291 PowerCommand Input/Output AUX 101 Module  0541-0772 PowerCommand Input/Output AUX 102 Expansion Module  A054V134 Lon Gateway - LonWorks to Modbus Converter  0541-0770 Network Genset Communications Module (NCM) for PCC 2100  0541-0813 Network Genset Communications Module (GCM) for PCC 3100  0541-0809 Network Genset Communications Module (NCM) for PCC 3200/3201  0541-0810 Controls Communications Module, generator set (CCM-G)  0541-0811 Controls Communications Module, transfer switch (CCM-T)  0541-0868 Network Communications Module (NCM) for OTPC/BTPC, >1000 A  A040T087 ModLon Connection Cable Ordering Information Part number Description A062J030 PC500 LN (up to 2 devices) A062J029 PC550 LN (up to 12 devices) 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 167 of 234 Generator set data sheet Specifications subject to change without notice cummins.com NAD-C200N6 March 2022 Model C200N6 Frequency 60 Hz Fuel type Natural gas and propane kW (kVa) ratings 200 (250) natural gas standby 180 (225) natural gas prime 130 (163) propane standby Emissions EPA-certified for stationary emergency and non-emergency applications Exhaust emission data sheet EDS-3061 Sound performance data sheet MSP-4053 Cooling performance data sheet MCP-2101 Prototype test summary data sheet PTS-684 Standard set-mounted radiator cooling outline C200N6-01 Fuel consumption 1/4 load 1/2 load 3/4 load full load 200 kW natural gas standby Fuel consumption for cfh and m3/hr is based on 1015 Btu/ft3. cfh 635 1269 1692 2115 m3/hr 18 36 48 60 MMBtu/hr 0.64 1.29 1.72 2.15 180 kW natural gas prime Fuel consumption for cfh and m3/hr is based on 1015 Btu/ft3. cfh 518 1341 1630 2043 m3/hr 15 38 46 58 MMBtu/hr 0.53 1.36 1.65 2.07 130 kW propane standby Fuel consumption for cfh and m3/hr is based on 2353 Btu/ft3 cfh 244 488 651 814 m3/hr 7 141823 MMBtu/hr 0.57 1.15 1.53 1.66 Fuel supply Fuel supply pressure is measured at the factory-supplied fuel shut-off (FSO) valve. Fuel inlet pressure must not exceed 25 in. WC under any operating condition. Minimum operating pressure, in. H20 (kPa)7 (1.74) Maximum operating pressure, in. H20 (kPa)11 (2.74) provide with automatic fuel transfer 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 168 of 234 Specifications subject to change without notice cummins.com NAD-C200N6 March 2022 2 Engine 200 NG standby 180 NG prime 130 propane standby Engine manufacturer Power Systems International (PSI) Engine model 11.1 L Configuration Inline 6 Aspiration Turbocharged and coolant-air aftercooled Gross engine power output, bhp (kWm)302 (225) 272 (203) 208 (155) BMEP at set rated load, psi (kPa)197 (1358) 177 (1220) 136 (938) Bore, in. (mm)4.84 (123) Stroke, in. (mm)6.1 (155) Rated speed, rpm 1800 Piston speed, ft./min (m/s)1830 (9.3) Compression ratio 10.5:1 Lube oil capacity, qt. (L)26.5 (25) Overspeed limit, rpm 2100 Regenerative power, kW 11 Air Combustion air, cfm (m3/min)448 (12.69) Max air cleaner restriction (dirty filter), in. H2O (kPa)15 (3.7) Alternator cooling air, cfm (m3/min) Exhaust Exhaust flow at set rated load, cfm (m3/min)1425 (40.35) Exhaust temp, °F (°C)1350 (732) Max allowable system back pressure, in. H2O (kPa)41 (10.2) Catalyst back pressure, in. H2O (kPa)20.4 (5.08) Cooling Ambient design, °F (°C)122 (50) Fan load, HP (kWm)9 (6.7) Coolant capacity (with radiator), gal (L)23 (105) Cooling system air flow, acfm (m3/min)18,000 (510) Heat rejected, jacket water circuit, Btu/min (MJ/min)11,071 (11.68) Heat rejected, after-cooler circuit, Btu/min (MJ/min)1462 (1.54) Total heat radiated to room, Btu/min (MJ/min)12, 533 (13.2) Max cooling air flow static restriction, in. H2O (kPa)0.5 (0.12) Weight Weight represents a set with standard features. See outline drawing for weights of other configurations. Unit wet weight lbs. (kgs)5778 to 6091 (2620 to 2763) Refer to drawings for specific weights & dimensions 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 169 of 234 NAD-C200N6 March 2022 3 Cummins Inc. Box 3005 Columbus, IN 47202-3005 U.S.A. 1-800-CUMMINS™ (1-800-286-6467) cummins.com Printed in U.S.A. ©2022 Cummins Inc. Ratings definitions Emergency standby power (ESP): Applicable for supplying power to varying electrical load for the duration of power interruption of a reliable utility source. Emergency Standby Power (ESP) is in accordance with ISO 8528. Fuel Stop power is in accordance with ISO 3046, AS 2789, DIN 6271, and BS 5514. Prime power (PRP): Applicable for supplying power to varying electrical load for unlimited hours. Prime Power (PRP) is in accordance with ISO 8528. Ten percent overload capability is available in accordance with ISO 3046, AS 2789, DIN 6271, and BS 5514. Base load (continuous) power (COP): Applicable for supplying power continuously to a constant electrical load for unlimited hours. Continuous Power (COP) is in accordance with ISO 8528, ISO 3046, AS 2789, DIN 6271, and BS 5514. Demand Response Power Rating - Spark Ignited Gas (DRP): Applicable for supplying electrical power in parallel with commercially available power in variable and non-variable load applications. This fuel rating is intended for use in situations where power outages are contracted, such as in utility power curtailment. Engine operation is limited to a total of 500 hours per year. Engines may be operated in parallel to the public utility for up to 500 hours per year, with an average load factor no greater than 80% of rated Demand Response Power. Engines with Standby Power ratings available can be run in Emergency Standby appli- cations up to the Standby Power rating for up to 50 hours per year. The customer should be aware, however, that the life of any engine will be reduced by constant high load operation. Warning: Backfeed to a utility system can cause electrocution and/or property damage. Do not connect GenSets to any building electrical system except through an approved device or after the building main disconnect is open. Neutral connection must be bonded in accordance with National Electrical Code. Specifications are subject to change without notice. Power You Can Rely On To order, contact centralregionordergs@cummins.com. Visit cummins.com to view all your power solutions. Full-load amperage (FLA) at rated voltage Three-phase FLA based on 0.8 power factor (PF). 120/240 (1 Ph) 120/208 127/220 139/240 220/380 240/416 254/440 277/480 347/600 200 kW N/A 694 656 601 380 347 328 301 241 180 kW N/A 625 590 541 342 312 295 271 217 130 kW N/A 451 426 391 247 226 213 195 156 Derates Engine power available up to 1200 ft. (366 m) and ambient temperatures up to 77 ˚F (25 ˚C). Above these conditions, derate at 2.5% per 1000 ft. (305 m) and 1.5% per 10 ˚F (5.6 ˚C) to a maximum of 10,000 ft. ISO 9001:2015 This product has been manufactured under the controls established by an approved management system that conforms with ISO 9001:2015. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 170 of 234 Cummins Inc. Data and specification subject to change without notice ADS-212 (10/17) Alternator data sheet Frame size: UCD3J Characteristics Weights: Wound stator assembly: 670.205 lb 304 kg Rotor assembly: 597.45 lb 271.9 kg Complete alternator: 1602.76 lb 727 kg Maximum speed: 2250 rpm Excitation current: Full load: 2.20 Amps No load: 0.50 Amps Insulation system: Class H throughout 1 ∅ Ratings (1.0 power factor) 60 Hz (winding no) 50 Hz (winding no) (Based on specific temperature rise at 40 °C ambient temperature) Double delta 4 lead Double delta 120/240 120/240 110-120 220-240 125 °C Rise ratings kW/kVA 161/201 175/219 140/175 105 °C Rise ratings kW/kVA 150/188 157/196 126/158 3 ∅ Ratings (0.8 power factor) Upper broad range LBR* 347/600 Broad range (Based on specified temperature rise at 40 °C ambient temperature) 120/208 240/416 127/220 255/440 139/240 277/480 190-208 380-416 347/600 110/190 220/380 115/200 230/400 120/208 240/415 127/220 254/440 150 °C Rise ratings kW kVA 230 288 240 300 255 319 255 319 230 288 200 250 200 250 200 250 172 215 125 °C Rise ratings kW kVA 215 269 225 281 240 300 240 300 215 269 184 230 184 230 184 230 164 205 105 °C Rise ratings kW kVA 200 250 211 264 220 275 220 275 200 250 168 210 168 210 168 210 148 185 80 °C Rise ratings kW kVA 170 213 180 225 190 238 190 238 170 213 154 193 154 193 154 193 128 160 3 ∅ Reactances (per unit, ±10%) 416 440 480 380 600 380 400 415 440 (Based on full load at 105 °C rise rating) Synchronous 2.651 2.457 2.221 2.00 2.00 1.939 1.75 1.626 N/A Transient 0.164 0.153 0.137 0.13 0.13 0.103 0.093 0.086 N/A Subtransient 0.096 0.09 0.08 0.07 0.07 0.07 0.064 0.059 N/A Negative sequence 0.117 0.109 0.098 0.14 0.14 0.117 0.105 0.098 N/A Zero sequence 0.048 0.045 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.044 0.04 0.037 N/A 3 ∅ Motor starting Broad range LBR* 600 Broad range Maximum kVA (Shunt) 770 770 770 535 (90% sustained voltage) (PMG) 920 920 920 678 Time constants (Sec) Transient 0.045 0.045 0.045 0.045 Subtransient 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 Open circuit 1.270 1.270 1.270 1.270 DC 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 Windings (@ 20° C) Stator resistance (Ohms per phase) 0.0128 0.0128 0.0128 0.0128 Rotor resistance (Ohms) 2.0000 2.0000 2.0000 2.0000 Number of leads 12 12 6 12 * Lower broad range 110/190 thru 120/208, 220/380 thru 240/416. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 171 of 234 Cummins Inc. Data and specification subject to change without notice ADS-212 (10/17) Alternator data sheet Frame size: UCD3J 60 Hz 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 172 of 234 Cummins Inc. Data and specification subject to change without notice ADS-212 (10/17) Alternator data sheet Frame size: UCD3J 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 173 of 234 Cummins Inc. Data and specification subject to change without notice ADS-212 (10/17) Alternator data sheet Frame size: UCD3J 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 174 of 234 Specifications subject to change without notice cummins.com MSP-4053 February 2022 Sound data sheet C200N6 60 Hz spark-ignited generator set (GenSet) A-weighted sound pressure levels (SPLs) @ 7 meters in dB(A) The reference sound pressure is 20 µPa. Configuration Position* 8 position average SPL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Standard unhoused with infinite exhaust 80.7 84.6 85.3 84.4 82.5 86.9 85.9 84.9 84.4 Weather-protective enclosure with muffler 83.4 83.0 81.3 83.1 85.5 84.5 81.5 83.1 83.2 Sound-attenuated enclosure Level II with muffler 73.0 70.5 70.8 72.2 71.1 73.6 71.9 72.9 72.0 *Position 1 faces the GenSet front. The positions proceed around the GenSet in a counter- clockwise direction in 45° increments. All positions are approximately 7 m (23 ft.) from the surface of the GenSet and approximately 1.2 m (48 in) from floor level. A-weighted sound power levels (SPWLs) @ 1 meter in dB(A) The reference sound power is 1 pW (10-12 W). Configuration Octave band center frequency (Hz) Total SPWL 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 Standard unhoused with infinite exhaust 75.7 93.3 99.7 105.3 106.8 106.8 103.1 99.6 112.3 Weather-protective enclosure with muffler 92.9 97.3 100.1 105.3 105.7 104.1 99.7 97.7 111.1 Sound-attenuated enclosure Level II with muffler 84.9 93.3 95.4 96.9 95.8 94.7 90.1 86.6 102.8 Data is based on a 100% rated load with a standard radiator cooling package. Sound levels are subject to instrumentation, measurement, installation, and manufacturing variability. The sound data for a GenSet with infinite exhaust does not include the exhaust noise contribution. Sound power levels are calculated according to ISO 3744 and ISO 8528-10 requirements. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 175 of 234 UNITED STATES ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY 2022 MODEL YEAR CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY WITH THE CLEAN AIR ACT OFFICE OF TRANSPORTATION AND AIR QUALITY ANN ARBOR, MICHIGAN 48105 Certificate Issued To: Power Solutions International, Inc. (U.S. Manufacturer or Importer) Certificate Number: NPSIB11.1NGP-014 Effective Date: 08/05/2021 Expiration Date: 12/31/2022 _________________________ Byron J. Bunker, Division Director Compliance Division Issue Date: 08/05/2021 Revision Date: N/A Manufacturer: Power Solutions International, Inc. Engine Family: NPSIB11.1NGP Mobile/Stationary Certification Type: Mobile and Stationary Fuel : LPG/Propane Natural Gas (CNG/LNG) Emission Standards : Mobile Part 1048 HC + NOx ( g/kW-hr ) : 2.7 CO ( g/kW-hr ) : 4.4 NMHC + NOx ( g/kW-hr ) : 2.7 Stationary Part 1048 HC + NOx ( g/kW-hr ) : 2.7 CO ( g/kW-hr ) : 4.4 NMHC + NOx ( g/kW-hr ) : 2.7 Part 60 Subpart JJJJ Table 1 VOC ( g/Hp-hr ) : 0.7 NOx ( g/Hp-hr ) : 1.0 CO ( g/Hp-hr ) : 2.0 Emergency Use Only : N Pursuant to Section 213 of the Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C. section 7547) and 40 CFR Part 60, 40 CFR Part 1048, 1065, 1068, and 60 ( stationary only and combined stationary and mobile ) and subject to the terms and conditions prescribed in those provisions, this certificate of conformity is hereby issued with respect to the test engines which have been found to conform to applicable requirements and which represent the following nonroad engines, by engine family, more fully described in the documentation required by 40 CFR Part 60, 40 CFR Part 1048 and produced in the stated model year. This certificate of conformity covers only those new nonroad spark-ignition engines which conform in all material respects to the design specifications that applied to those engines described in the documentation required by 40 CFR Part 60, 40 CFR Part 1048 and which are produced during the model year stated on this certificate of the said manufacturer, as defined in 40 CFR Part 60, 40 CFR Part 1048. This certificate of conformity does not cover nonroad engines imported prior to the effective date of the certificate. It is a term of this certificate that the manufacturer shall consent to all inspections described in 40 CFR 1068.20 and authorized in a warrant or court order. Failure to comply with the requirements of such a warrant or court order may lead to revocation or suspension of this certificate for reasons specified in 40 CFR Part 60, 40 CFR Part 1048. It is also a term of this certificate that this certificate may be revoked or suspended or rendered void ab initio for other reasons specified in 40 CFR Part 60, 40 CFR Part 1048. This certificate does not cover large nonroad engines sold, offered for sale, or introduced, or delivered for introduction, into commerce in the U.S. prior to the effective date of the certificate. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 176 of 234 PowerPact® M-, P- and R-Frame, and Compact® NS630b–NS3200 Circuit Breakers Catalog 0612CT0101R0709 2009 Class 0612 CONTENTS Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Electronic Trip Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 PowerPact® M-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 PowerPact® P-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 PowerPact® R-Frame Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Compact® NS630b–NS1600 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Compact® NS1600b–NS3200 Circuit Breaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 P-Frame Cradles and Cradle Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 Dimensional Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Trip Curves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 177 of 234 PowerPact® M-, P- and R-Frame, and Compact® NS630b–NS3200 Circuit Breakers General Information 9 08/2009© 2001–2009 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Circuit Breaker Ratings Interrupting Rating The interrupting rating is the highest current at rated voltage the circuit breaker is designed to safely interrupt under standard test conditions. Circuit breakers must be selected with interrupting ratings equal to or greater than the available short-circuit current at the point where the circuit breaker is applied to the system (unless it is a branch device in a series rated combination). Interrupting ratings are shown on the front of the circuit breaker. For grounded B phase interrupting ratings, see Data Bulletin 2700DB0202. Table 2: UL/IEC Circuit Breaker Interrupting Ratings Circuit Breaker1 UL/CSA Rating (60 Hz)IEC 60947-2 Rating (50/60 Hz) 3 Phase Grounded B Phase (1Ø-3Ø)240 Vac 380/415 Vac 240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac 240 Vac 2P 240 Vac 3P 480 Vac 3P Icu Ics Icu Ics MG 65 kA 35 kA 18 kA 65 kA —— 50 kA 25 kA 35 kA 20 kA MJ 100 kA 65 kA 25 kA 65 kA —— 65 kA 35 kA 50 kA 25 kA PG 65 kA 35 kA 18 kA 65 kA 65 kA 35 kA 50 kA 25 kA 35 kA 20 kA PJ 100 kA 65 kA 25 kA 65 kA 100 kA 14 kA 65 kA 35 kA 50 kA 25 kA PK 65 kA 50 kA 50 kA 65 kA 65 kA 35 kA 50 kA 25 kA 50 kA 25 kA PL 125 kA 100 kA 25 kA 65 kA 100 kA 14 kA 125 kA 65 kA 85 kA 45 kA RG 65 kA 35 kA 18 kA —65 kA 35 kA 50 kA 25 kA 35 kA 20 kA RJ 100 kA 65 kA 25 kA 100 kA 100 kA 35 kA 65 kA 35 kA 50 kA 25 kA RK 65 kA 65 kA 65 kA — 65 kA 35 kA 85 kA 65 kA 70 kA 55 kA RL 125 kA 100 kA 50 kA 125 kA 125 kA 35 kA 125 kA 65 kA 85 kA 45 kA 1 The K interrupting rating is recommended for applications having high inrush and/or non-linear loads such as large motors, transformers, motors with soft starts, etc. Table 3: IEC Only Circuit Breaker Interrupting Ratings (50/60 Hz) Circuit Breaker 220/240 Vac 380/415 Vac 440 Vac 500/525 Vac 660/690 Vac Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics NS630b–NS1600 N Interrupting Rating 50 kA 75% Icu 50 kA 75% Icu 50 kA 75% Icu 40 kA 75% Icu 30 kA 75% Icu NS630b–NS1600 H Interrupting Rating 70 kA 50% Icu 70 kA 50% Icu 65 kA 50% Icu 50 kA 50% Icu 42 kA 50% Icu NS630b–NS1000 L Interrupting Rating 150 kA 100% Icu 150 kA 100% Icu 130 kA 100% Icu 100 kA 100% Icu 25 kA 100% Icu NS1600b–NS3200 N Interrupting Rating 85 kA 75% Icu 70 kA 75% Icu 65 kA 100% Icu 65 kA 100% Icu 65 kA 100% Icu NS1600b–NS3200 H Interrupting Rating 125 kA 75% Icu 85 kA 75% Icu 85 kA 75% Icu ———— 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 178 of 234 © 2001–2009 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved PowerPact® M-, P- and R-Frame, and Compact® NS630b–NS3200 Circuit Breakers General Information 16 08/2009 Catalog Numbering System The M-frame, P-frame, R-frame and NS630b–NS3200 circuit breakers and cradles follow a “smart” catalog numbering system. The following tables are intended as a tool to decipher existing catalog numbers. They are not intended for use in building catalog numbers, as some combinations may not be available. To build a catalog number, please see the Digest, the Product Selector or contact the local field office. M-Frame, P-Frame and R-Frame Circuit Breaker Catalog Numbers NOTE:Not all options are available on all frames. Table 10: Catalog Number for M-, P- and R-Frame (UL/IEC Dual-rated) Circuit Breakers Field Position Field Description Options Description 1 Brand Name (blank)Square D® N Schneider Electric® (Formerly Merlin Gerin brand) 2 Circuit Breaker Frame M800 A Max. P 1200 A Max. R 3000 A Max. 3 Interrupting Rating G 35 kA @ 480 Vac J 65 kA @ 480 Vac K P-Frame: 50 kA @ 600 Vac R-Frame: 65 kA @ 600 Vac L 100 kA @ 480 Vac 4 Connection F No Lugs L Lugs on Both Ends M Lugs on I/ON End P Lugs on O/OFF End AI-Line D Drawout (Not Available on M and R Frames) 5Poles 22P 33P 44P 6 Voltage Rating 4480 V 6600 V 7–9 Ampere Rating ###Circuit Breaker Rating (120 = 1200 A) 000 Automatic Switch Value 10 Standard or 100% Rated (none)Standard Rated C100% rated Continued on next page 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 179 of 234 PowerPact® M-, P- and R-Frame, and Compact® NS630b–NS3200 Circuit Breakers General Information 17 08/2009© 2001–2009 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved 11–14 Circuit Breaker Trip System (none) ET1.0 (M-Frame) (none) ET1.0I (P-Frame, R-Frame) U31 Micrologic ® 3.0 Trip Unit U33 Micrologic 5.0 Trip Unit U41 Micrologic 3.0A Trip Unit U43 Micrologic 5.0A Trip Unit U44 Micrologic 6.0A Trip Unit U63 Micrologic 5.0P Trip Unit U64 Micrologic 6.0P Trip Unit U73 Micrologic 5.0H Trip Unit U74 Micrologic 6.0H Trip Unit Automatic Switch Trip System1 S60 600 A2 S80 800 A2 S10 1000 A2 S12 1200 A S16 1600 A S20 2000 A S25 2500 A Motor Circuit Protector Trip System M68 1200–9600 A2 M69 1500–9600 A2 M70 1800–9600 A2 15 Rating Plug A–H See Table 73 16-17 Modbus® Communication E1 Modbus BCM 18 I-Line® Phasing See Digest, Product Selector For Factory-Installed Accessories, See Product Selector 1 For more information on P-frame switches, see page 47. For more information on R-frame switches, see page 56. 2 Not available on R-frame. Table 10: Catalog Number for M-, P- and R-Frame (UL/IEC Dual-rated) Circuit Breakers Field Position Field Description Options Description 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 180 of 234 PowerPact® M-, P- and R-Frame, and Compact® NS630b–NS3200 Circuit Breakers Electronic Trip Systems 23 08/2009© 2001–2009 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved exceeded, will trip the circuit breaker with no intentional delay. Instantaneous trip dial settings are 2–16 x In for 600 A circuit breakers and 1.5–12 x In for 800–1200 A circuit breakers. Micrologic® Electronic Trip Systems The P-frame, R-frame and NS630b–NS3200 electronic trip circuit breakers can be equipped with the optional Micrologic trip systems listed below: Trip units are designed to protect power circuits and loads. Micrologic trip systems use a set of current transformers (called CTs or sensors) to sense current, a trip unit to evaluate the current, and a tripping solenoid to trip the circuit breaker. Adjustable rotary switches on the trip unit allow the user to set the proper overcurrent or equipment ground-fault current protection required in the electrical system. If current exceeds a set value for longer than its set time delay, the trip system opens the circuit breaker. Alarms may be programmed for remote indications. Measurements of current, voltage, frequency, power, and power quality optimize continuity of service and energy management. Integration of protection functions in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) electronic component used in all Micrologic trip units guarantees a high degree of reliability and immunity to conducted or radiated disturbances. On Micrologic P and H trip units, advanced functions are managed by an independent microprocessor. Circuit breakers are shipped with the trip unit long-time pickup switch set at 1.0 and all other trip unit adjustments set at their lowest settings. Actual settings required for a specific application must be determined by a qualified consultant or plant engineer. A coordination study is recommended to provide coordination between all circuit breakers in the distribution system. Table 15: Micrologic Trip Systems Model (LS0) Long-time + Short-time + Zero delay (IEC Rated Only) (LI) Long-time + Instantaneous Protection (UL Listed, IEC Rated) (LSI) Long-time + Short-time + Instantaneous Protection (UL LIsted, IEC Rated) (LSIG) Long-time + Short-time + Instantaneous Protection + Equipment Ground-fault Protection (UL LIsted, IEC Rated) Micrologic Basic Trip Unit 2.0 3.0 5.0 — Micrologic A Trip Unit 2.0A 3.0A 5.0A 6.0A Micrologic P Trip Unit ——5.0P 6.0P Micrologic H Trip Unit ——5.0H 6.0H Table 16: Micrologic ® Trip Unit Features Feature Micrologic Trip Unit (X = Standard Feature O = Available Option) Standard Ammeter Power Harmonics 2.0 3.0 5.0 2.0A 3.0A 5.0A 6.0A 5.0P 6.0P 5.0H 6.0H Field-Installable XXXXXXXXXXX LI X X LS0 X X LSI X X X X LSIG/Ground-Fault Trip1 XXX Ground-Fault Alarm/No Trip1, 2 XX Ground-Fault Alarm and Trip1, 2 XX Adjustable Rating Plugs XXXXXXXXXXX True RMS Sensing XXXXXXXXXXX UL Listed XX XXXXXXX Thermal Imaging XXXXXXXXXXX Phase-Loading Bar Graph XXXXXXXX LED for Long-Time Pick-Up XXXXXXXXXXX LED for Trip Indication XXXXXXXX Digital Ammeter XXXXXXXX 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 181 of 234 PowerPact® M-, P- and R-Frame, and Compact® NS630b–NS3200 Circuit Breakers Electronic Trip Systems 25 08/2009© 2001–2009 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved • Micrologic 5.0P delaysetting x Ir 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 8 10 Isd 1.5 .4 .45 .5 .6 .63 .7 .8 .9 1 short tsd (s) on I2t . . .. . . . . 0 off instantaneous long time alarmIr x In .5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 tr (s) @ 6 Ir24 06 1 3 3 4 8 0 85kA 30kA 24s 5000A I(A) Trip 0.4s I i x In 2 4 10 3 6 8 12 15 off Micrologic 6.0P .4 .45 .5 .6 .63 .7 .8 .9 1 delay short tsd (s) on I2t . . .. . . . . 0 off instantaneous long time alarmIr x In ground fault B C D E G H J Ig tg (s) on I2t . . .. . . . . 0 offA setting x Ir 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 8 10 Isd 1.5 .5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 tr (s) @ 6 Ir24 test 06 1 3 3 4 8 3 85kA 30kA 24s 5000A I(A) Trip 0.4s I i x In 2 4 10 3 6 8 12 15 off Micrologic 5.0H delaysetting x Ir 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 8 10 Isd 1.5 .4 .45 .5 .6 .63 .7 .8 .9 1 short tsd (s) on I2t .2 .3 .4 .4 .1 .2 .3 .1 0 off instantaneous long time alarmIr x In .5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 tr (s) @ 6 Ir24 I (A) V (V) P (kW) E (kWh) Harmonics 06 1 3 3 4 7 9 I i x In 2 4 10 3 6 8 12 15 off Micrologic 6.0H .4 .45 .5 .6 .63 .7 .8 .9 1 delay short tsd (s) on I2t .2 .3 .4 .4 .1 .2 .3 .1 0 off instantaneous long time alarmIr x In ground fault B C D E G H J Ig tg (s) on I2t .2 .3 .4 .4 .1 .2 .3 .1 0 off A setting x Ir 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 8 10 Isd 1.5 .5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 tr (s) @ 6 Ir24 test 06 1 3 3 4 8 2 I (A) V (V) P (kW) E (kWh) Harmonics I i x In 2 4 10 3 6 8 12 15 off Micrologic 5.0H and 6.0H Trip UnitsMicrologic 5.0P and 6.0P Trip Units The Micrologic 2.0, 3.0, and 5.0 basic trip units protect power circuits. Protection Settings Protection thresholds and delays are set using the rotary switches. A full-range of long- time settings are available via field-installable adjustable rating plugs. • Overload protection — True RMS long-time protection — Thermal imaging: Active thermal imaging before and after tripping • Short-circuit protection — Short-time RMS — Selection of I2t type (ON or OFF) for short-time delay • Instantaneous protection • Neutral protection on four-pole circuit breakers 1 2 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .95 .98 1 delay short time I itsd (s) on I 2 t .2 .3 .4 .4 .1 .2 .3 .1 0 off instantaneous long time alarmIr x In 4 5 6 .5 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 tr (s) @ 6 Ir 24 setting x Ir 2 2.5 3 4 5 6 8 10 Isd 1.5 x In 3 4 6 8 10 12 15 off2 3 Micrologic 5.0 06 1 3 3 2 5 3 1—Long-time current setting and tripping delay 2—Short-time pickup and tripping delay 3—Overload signal (LED) 4—Long-time rating plug screw 5—Instantaneous pickup 6—Test connector 0 I t Ir tr Ii 06 1 3 3 3 2 2 Table 17: Micrologic 2.0 and 3.0 Basic Trip Unit Settings Long-time Protection Current setting (A) Tripping between 1.05 and 1.20 x Ir Ir = ln x ... 2.0: 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 0.95 0.98 1.00 3.0: 0.40 0.45 0.50 0.60 0.63 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00 Other ranges are available by changing rating plug Maximum Time Delay (s) Accuracy: 0 to –20% tr at 1.5 x Ir 12.5 25 50 100 200 300 400 500 600 tr at 6 x Ir 0.51 2 4 8 12162024 tr at 7.2 x Ir 0.34 0.69 1.38 2.7 5.5 8.3 11 13.8 16.6 Thermal Imaging 20 minutes before or after tripping Short-time Protection Current Setting (A) Accuracy: ±10% No delay Isd = Ir x ...2.0:1.522.53456810 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 182 of 234 PowerPact® M-, P- and R-Frame, and Compact® NS630b–NS3200 Circuit Breakers Electronic Trip Systems 31 08/2009© 2001–2009 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Tripping and Alarm Histories The last ten trips and ten alarms are recorded in two separate history files that can be displayed on the screen (sample displays are shown). The following information is contained in these files: Metering The Micrologic P trip unit calculates in real time the electrical values V, A, W, VAR, VA, Wh, VARh, VAh, Hz, power factor and crest factor. It also calculates demand current and power over an adjustable time period. Table 27: Micrologic P Use of External 24 Vdc Power Supply Function Without 24 Vdc Power Supply at F1 and F2 With 24 Vdc Power Supply at F1 and F2 Fault Protection for LSIG Functions Yes Yes LED Trip Indication Yes Yes LCD Display and Backlight are Functional Yes1 Yes Ground-Fault Push-to-Trip Button Works for Testing Ground Fault2 Yes1 Yes Metering, Monitoring, and History Logs are Functional Yes 1 Yes Communications Between Trip Unit and M2C and M6C Programmable Contact Modules No Yes Operation of M6C Programmable Contact Module No Yes, with separate 24 Vdc power supply for the module Modbus® Communications No Yes, with separate 24 Vdc power supply for the circuit breaker communication module 1 If circuit breaker has 100 Vac or more between two phases or phase to neutral and is bottom fed or closed in a top fed application. 2 Ground-fault push-to-trip button will also be functional if hand-held test kit or full-function test kit is powering the trip unit. Trip History Alarm History • Type of fault • Type of alarm • Date and time of fault • Date and time of alarm • Interrupted current • Values measured at time of alarm 06 1 3 3 2 6 3 I1 = 4800 A I2 = 5600 A I3 = 4000 A IN = 200 A 03/08/1999 Ir = 4000 A 11:04:18 am Trip06 1 3 3 2 6 2 Trip history 30/06/1999 Vmax 27/07/1999 Isd 03/08/1999 Ir Trip History Alarm History 06 1 3 3 2 5 6 85kA 30kA 24s 5000 A I(A) Trip 0.4s 06 1 3 3 2 5 7 Imax IA = 4800 A IB = 4600 A IC = 4000 A IN = 200 A I = 13 A instant. Current Metering Maximum Current 06 1 3 3 2 5 8 Vinst. VAB = 460 V VBC = 464 V VCA = 461 V VAN = 270 V VBN = 279 V VCN = 273 V 06 1 3 3 2 5 9 Pinst. P (kW) 2180 Q (kVAR) - 650 S (kVA) 2280 Voltage Metering Power Metering 06 1 3 3 2 6 0 F (Hz) 60.0 06 1 3 3 2 6 1 Pdemand P (kW) 2180 Q (kVAR) - 650 S (kVA) 2280 Frequency Power Demand 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 183 of 234 © 2001–2009 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved PowerPact® M-, P- and R-Frame, and Compact® NS630b–NS3200 Circuit Breakers PowerPact® P-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers 42 08/2009 Catalog Numbers Table 36: UL/IEC Rated, Unit-Mount 1, Manually-Operated, Standard-Rated Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers with Basic Electronic Trip and Micrologic® Electronic Trip Unit Trip Unit Circuit Breaker Catalog Number (Prefix Required) Prefix Current Rating (Sensor Rating) Type 250 A 400 A 600 A 800 A 1000 A 1200 A Basic Electronic Trip Unit (Not Interchangeable) ET1.0I 2P2, 3P Fixed Long-time PGL — —36060 36080 36100 36120 PJL — —36060 36080 36100 36120 PKL — —36060 36080 36100 36120 PLL — —34060 34080 34100 34120 Micrologic Interchangeable Standard Trip Unit 3.0 (LI) 3P, 4P3 (G & K only) PGL 36025U31A 36040U31A 36060U31A 36080U31A 36100U31A 36120U31A PJL 36025U31A 36040U31A 36060U31A 36080U31A 36100U31A 36120U31A PKL 36025U31A 36040U31A 36060U31A 36080U31A 36100U31A 36120U31A PLL4 34025U31A 34040U31A 34060U31A 34080U31A 34100U31A 34120U31A 5.0 (LSI) 3P 4P3 (G & K only) PGL 36025U33A 36040U33A 36060U33A 36080U33A 36100U33A 36120U33A PJL 36025U33A 36040U33A 36060U33A 36080U33A 36100U33A 36120U33A PKL 36025U33A 36040U33A 36060U33A 36080U33A 36100U33A 36120U33A PLL4 34025U33A 34040U33A 34060U33A 34080U33A 34100U33A 34120U33A Micrologic Interchangeable Ammeter Trip Unit5 3.0A (LI) 3P 4P3 (G & K only) PGL 36025U41A 36040U41A 36060U41A 36080U41A 36100U41A 36120U41A PJL 36025U41A 36040U41A 36060U41A 36080U41A 36100U41A 36120U41A PKL 36025U41A 36040U41A 36060U41A 36080U41A 36100U41A 36120U41A PLL4 34025U41A 34040U41A 34060U41A 34080U41A 34100U41A 34120U41A 5.0A (LSI) 3P 4P3 (G & K only) PGL 36025U43A 36040U43A 36060U43A 36080U43A 36100U43A 36120U43A PJL 36025U43A 36040U43A 36060U43A 36080U43A 36100U43A 36120U43A PKL 36025U43A 36040U43A 36060U43A 36080U43A 36100U43A 36120U43A PLL4 34025U43A 34040U43A 34060U43A 34080U43A 34100U43A 34120U43A 6.0A (LSIG) 3P 4P3 (G & K only) PGL 36025U44A 36040U44A 36060U44A 36080U44A 36100U44A 36120U44A PJL 36025U44A 36040U44A 36060U44A 36080U44A 36100U44A 36120U44A PKL 36025U44A 36040U44A 36060U44A 36080U44A 36100U44A 36120U44A PLL4 34025U44A 34040U44A 34060U44A 34080U44A 34100U44A 34120U44A Micrologic Interchangeable Power Trip Unit with Modbus® Communications 5.0P (LSI) 3P 4P3 (G & K only) PGL 36025U63AE1 36040U63AE1 36060U63AE1 36080U63AE1 36100U63AE1 36120U63AE1 PJL 36025U63AE1 36040U63AE1 36060U63AE1 36080U63AE1 36100U63AE1 36120U63AE1 PKL 36025U63AE1 36040U63AE1 36060U63AE1 36080U63AE1 36100U63AE1 36120U63AE1 PLL4 34025U63AE1 34040U63AE1 34060U63AE1 34080U63AE1 34100U63AE1 34120U63AE1 6.0P (LSIG) 3P 4P3 (G & K only) PGL 36025U64AE1 36040U64AE1 36060U64AE1 36080U64AE1 36100U64AE1 36120U64AE1 PJL 36025U64AE1 36040U64AE1 36060U64AE1 36080U64AE1 36100U64AE1 36120U64AE1 PKL 36025U64AE1 36040U64AE1 36060U64AE1 36080U64AE1 36100U64AE1 36120U64AE1 PLL4 34025U64AE1 34040U64AE1 34060U64AE1 34080U64AE1 34100U64AE1 34120U64AE1 Micrologic Interchangeable Harmonic Trip Unit with Modbus Communications 5.0H (LSI) 3P 4P3 (G & K only) PGL 36025U73AE1 36040U73AE1 36060U73AE1 36080U73AE1 36100U73AE1 36120U73AE1 PJL 36025U73AE1 36040U73AE1 36060U73AE1 36080U73AE1 36100U73AE1 36120U73AE1 PKL 36025U73AE1 36040U73AE1 36060U73AE1 36080U73AE1 36100U73AE1 36120U73AE1 PLL4 34025U73AE1 34040U73AE1 34060U73AE1 34080U73AE1 34100U73AE1 34120U73AE1 6.0H (LSIG) 3P 4P3 (G & K only) PGL 36025U74AE1 36040U74AE1 36060U74AE1 36080U74AE1 36100U74AE1 36120U74AE1 PJL 36025U74AE1 36040U74AE1 36060U74AE1 36080U74AE1 36100U74AE1 36120U74AE1 PKL 36025U74AE1 36040U74AE1 36060U74AE1 36080U74AE1 36100U74AE1 36120U74AE1 PLL4 34025U74AE1 34040U74AE1 34060U74AE1 34080U74AE1 34100U74AE1 34120U74AE1 1 Catalog numbers are for circuit breakers with lugs on line and load ends. Consult the Product Selector for catalog numbers for circuit breakers with alternate terminations. 2 For 2P, replace the leading 3 in the catalog number following the prefix with a 2 (PGL36025 becomes PGL26025.) 3 For 4P, replace the leading 3 in the catalog number following the prefix with a 4 (PGL36025U31A becomes PGL46025U31A). 4 The L interrupting rating at 600 Vac is 25 kA 5 Add E1 suffix for Modbus communications. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 184 of 234 © 2001–2009 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved PowerPact® M-, P- and R-Frame, and Compact® NS630b–NS3200 Circuit Breakers PowerPact® P-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers 50 08/2009 Figure 2: Accessory Control Wiring Diagrams for Manually-operated Circuit Breakers Trip Unit Type Basic A P H Connector Description — • • • Com: E1-E6 Circuit breaker communication module E1 = +24 Vdc E2 = Common E3 = Out - E4 = Out + E5 = In - E6 = In + — • • • Z Zone-selective interlocking (ZSI) Z1 = ZSI OUT signal Z2 = ZSI OUT Z3 = ZSI IN signal Z4 = ZSI IN short-time delay Z5 = ZSI IN ground fault — • • • T External neutral sensor Connector Recommended Wire Size — • • • F 24 Vdc external power supply V1, V2, V3, Vn 22–16 AWG (0.3–1.5 mm 2)——••Vn1External neutral voltage takeoff E1–E2 22 AWG (0.3 mm2) MIN shielded pair cable or twisted pair copper wires — — • • V1, V2, V3 External phase voltage takeoff T 22 AWG (0.3 mm 2) stranded shielded cable — — • • M6C 2: Q1, Q2, Q3 6 programmable contacts 24 Vdc external power supply required M Refer to MDGF instructions Function Connector Description E3–E6, Q1, Q2, Q3 22 AWG (0.3 mm2) shielded twisted pairs with drain (Belden 8723 or equal)3 Auxiliary Contacts OF Open/Closed circuit breaker or switch position contacts OF, SD, SDE 18–16 AWG (0.8–1.5 mm 2)SD Bell alarm MN, MX 18–14 AWG (0.8–2.5 mm2)SDE Electrical fault alarm contact F Size per aux 24 Vdc power supply Remote Operation MN Undervoltage trip device Z1–Z5 22–18 AWG (0.3–0.8 mm2) MX Shunt trip 1 Neutral voltage supplied with flying leads. 2 Optional M6C programmable contacts are supplied with flying leads. 22 24 21 OF2 Cl o s e d 06 1 2 3 0 3 3 OF3 32 34 31 Op e n 12 14 11 OF1 92 94 91 SD Tr i p p e d 82 84 81 SDE Fa u l t T4T3T2T1 Z3 Z4 T3T2 Trip Unit Z4Z3Z2Z1 Z5 Z2Z1 NCBA Z5VNV1V2V3 M2M1 F2 + Upstream Downstream 24 V 06 1 2 3 0 3 1 T1 / M 3 T4 / F 1 - 06 1 2 3 1 0 7 or D2 D1 MN MX C2 C1 Power Trip Unit Remote Operation Alarm Contacts NOTE: All diagrams show circuit breaker in tripped position. A DC B A–Do not remove factory-installed jumpers between Z3, Z4 and Z5 unless ZSI is connected. B–Do not remove factory-installed jumper between T1 and T2 unless neutral CT is connected. Do not install jumper between T3 and T4. C–For proper wiring of neutral CT, refer to Instruction Bulletin 48041-082-01 shipped with it. D–24 Vdc power supply for trip unit must be separate and isolated from 24 Vdc power supply for communication modules. D1/C1 C3 MN/MX OF1 OF2 OF3 SD 82 81 SDE 84 11 21 31 91 VN 12 22 32 92 14 24 34 94 06 12 3108 E1 E6 Z2 T2 M2 F2 Z4Z3Z1 Z5 M1 T1 T4T3 E2 E3 E4 E5 D2/C2 -+ 24 Vdc V2 V1 V3 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 185 of 234 © 2001–2009 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved PowerPact® M-, P- and R-Frame, and Compact® NS630b–NS3200 Circuit Breakers Dimensional Drawings 94 08/2009 Figure 11: P-Frame and NS630b–NS1600 Individually-Mounted 3P Circuit Breaker 800 A with Lugs on Both Ends Figure 12: P-Frame and NS630b–NS1600 Individually-Mounted 4P Circuit Breaker 800 A with Lugs on Both Ends 12.86 2.492.50 [326,6] [63,6][63,3] 3. 8 4 [9 7 , 6 ] 25° 5° 28 ° Off Tripped On 4.45 [113,0] 0.30 0.49 [12,5] [7,5] 8.27 [210,0] Side View 8.27 2.762.76 [70,0][70,0] [210,0] 4. 2 3 5. 7 7 8. 0 7 [1 0 7 , 5 ] [1 4 6 , 5 ] [2 0 5 , 0 ] At Max 2.56 0.43 0.26 7.40 [188,0] [64,9] [6,5] [11,0] Back View 7. 8 7 7.83 3.92 0.22 [5,5][99,5] [199,0] [2 0 0 , 0 ] 48 0 9 6 - 3 2 0 - 0 1 Top View in. [mm]Dimensions: 12.86 2.492.50 [326,6] [63,6][63,3] 3. 8 4 [9 7 , 6 ] 25° 5° 28 ° Off Tripped On 4.45 [113,0] 0.30 0.49 [12,5] [7,5] 8.27 [210,0] Side View 11.02 2.762.76 [70,0][70,0] [280,0] 4. 2 3 5. 7 7 8. 0 7 [1 0 7 , 5 ] [1 4 6 , 5 ] [2 0 5 , 0 ] At Max 2.56 0.43 0.26 7.40 [188,0] [64,9] [6,5] [11,0] [70,0] 2.76 Back View 7. 8 7 10.59 3.92 0.22 [5,5][99,5] [269,0] [2 0 0 , 0 ] 48 0 9 6 - 3 5 3 - 0 1 Top View in. [mm]Dimensions: 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 186 of 234 PowerPact® M-, P- and R-Frame, and Compact® NS630b–NS3200 Circuit Breakers Dimensional Drawings 95 08/2009© 2001–2009 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Figure 13: P-Frame and NS630b–NS1600 Individually-Mounted 3P Circuit Breaker 800 A with Lugs on Both Ends Figure 14: P-Frame and NS630b–NS1600 Individually-Mounted 4P Circuit Breaker 800 A with Lugs on Both Ends 2.50 4.19 16.26 [63,6][106,5] [413,0] 3. 8 4 [9 7 , 6 ] 4.00 [101,5] 5° 25°28 ° Tripped OffOn 4.45 [113,0] 0.30 0.49 [7,5] [12,5] 8.27 [210,0] Side View 2.762.76 8.27 [70,0][70,0] [210,0] 4. 2 3 5. 7 7 8. 0 7 [1 0 7 , 5 ] [1 4 6 , 5 ] [2 0 5 , 0 ] 2.56 0.43 0.26 7.40 [188,0] [64,9] [6,5] [11,0] At Max Back View 3.92 0.22 7.83 [99,5][5,5] [199,0] 7. 8 7 [2 0 0 , 0 ] Top View 48 0 9 6 - 3 2 1 - 0 1 in. [mm]Dimensions: 2.50 4.19 16.26 [63,6][106,5] [413,0] 3. 8 4 [9 7 , 6 ] 4.00 [101,5] 5° 25°28 ° Tripped OffOn 4.45 [113,0] 0.30 0.49 [7,5] [12,5] 8.27 [210,0] Side View 2.762.76 11.02 [70,0][70,0] [280,0] 4. 2 3 5. 7 7 8. 0 7 [1 0 7 , 5 ] [1 4 6 , 5 ] [2 0 5 , 0 ] 2.56 0.43 0.26 7.40 [188,0] [64,9] [6,5] [11,0] At Max [70,0] 2.76 Back View 3.92 0.22 10.59 [99,5][5,5] [269,0] 7. 8 7 [2 0 0 , 0 ] Top View 48 0 9 6 - 3 5 4 - 0 1 in. [mm]Dimensions: 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 187 of 234 © 2001–2009 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved PowerPact® M-, P- and R-Frame, and Compact® NS630b–NS3200 Circuit Breakers Trip Curves 132 08/2009 Micrologic 5.0/6.0 P-Frame, R-Frame and NS630b–NS3200 A/P/H Trip Unit Characteristic Trip Curve 1. 5 1 1 CURRENT IN MULTIPLES OF Ir (Ir = LONG-TIME SETTING x In) CURRENT IN MULTIPLES OF Ir (Ir = LONG-TIME SETTING x In) .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1. 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 10 0 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 10 0 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 6000 7000 8000 9000 5000 10000 .005 .006 .007 .008 .009 .01 .015 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 .08 .09 .1 .005 .006 .007 .008 .009 .01 .015 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 .08 .09 .1 .15 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1 .15 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 150 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000 TI M E I N S E C O N D S CYCLE21 1 CYCLE 150 24 20 .5 24 16 12 8 8 6 4 2.51.5 2 35 10 4 2 1 16 0.4 OFF 0.3 OFF 0.2 OFF 0.1 OFF 0 LONG-TIME PICKUP x In = Ir LONG-TIME DELAY BANDS SECONDS AT 6 x Ir MAXIMUM UNRESTRAINED SHORT-TIME DELAY SHORT-TIME DELAY I2t OFF (FIXED-TIME DELAY) SECONDS AT 10 x Ir SHORT-TIME PICKUP x Ir Curve No. 0613TC0004 Drawing No. B48095-613-04 Micrologic 5.0/6.0 A/P/H Trip Units Long-Time Pickup and Delay Short-Time Pickup and I2t OFF Delay The time-current curve information is to be used for application and coordination purposes only. Notes: 1. There is a thermal-imaging effect that can act to shorten the long-time delay. The thermal- imaging effect comes into play if a current above the long-time delay pickup value exists for a time and then is cleared by the tripping of a downstream device or the circuit breaker itself. A subsequent overload will cause the circuit breaker to trip in a shorter time than normal. The amount of time delay reduction is inverse to the amount of time that has elapsed since the previous overload. Approximately twenty minutes is required between overloads to completely reset thermal-imaging. 2. The end of the curve is determined by the interrupting rating of the circuit breaker. 3. With zone-selective interlocking ON, short- time delay utilized, and no restraining signal, the maximum unrestrained short-time delay time band applies regardless of the setting. 4. Total clearing times shown include the response times of the trip unit, the circuit breaker opening, and the extinction of the current. 5. For a withstand circuit breaker, instantaneous can be turned OFF. See trip curve 613-7 on page 134 for instantaneous trip curve. See table on page 138 for instantaneous override values. 6. Overload indicator illuminates at 100%. B4 8 0 9 5 - 6 1 3 - 0 4 . e p s 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 188 of 234 PowerPact® M-, P- and R-Frame, and Compact® NS630b–NS3200 Circuit Breakers Trip Curves 133 08/2009© 2001–2009 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved Micrologic 5.0/6.0 P-Frame, R-Frame and NS630b–NS3200 A/P/H Trip Units Characteristic Trip Curve 1. 5 1 1 CURRENT IN MULTIPLES OF Ir (Ir = LONG-TIME SETTING x In) CURRENT IN MULTIPLES OF Ir (Ir = LONG-TIME SETTING x In) .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1. 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 10 0 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 10 0 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 6000 7000 8000 9000 5000 10000 .005 .006 .007 .008 .009 .01 .015 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 .08 .09 .1 .005 .006 .007 .008 .009 .01 .015 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 .08 .09 .1 .15 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1 .15 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 150 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000 TI M E I N S E C O N D S CYCLE21 1 CYCLE 150 2.52 345 68101.5 0.4 ON 0 . 4 O N 0 . 2 O N 0 . 3 O N 0 . 1 O N 0.3 ON 0.2 ON 0.1 ON SHORT-TIME DELAY I2t ON SECONDS AT 10 x Ir SHORT-TIME PICKUP x Ir MAXIMUM UNRESTRAINED SHORT-TIME DELAY Curve No. 0613TC0005 Drawing No. B48095-613-05 Micrologic 5.0/6.0 A/P/H Trip Units Short-Time Pickup and I2t ON Delay The time-current curve information is to be used for application and coordination purposes only. Notes: 1. There is a thermal-imaging effect that can act to shorten the long-time delay. The thermal- imaging effect comes into play if a current above the long-time delay pickup value exists for a time and then is cleared by the tripping of a downstream device or the circuit breaker itself. A subsequent overload will cause the circuit breaker to trip in a shorter time than normal. The amount of time delay reduction is inverse to the amount of time that has elapsed since the previous overload. Approximately twenty minutes is required between overloads to completely reset thermal-imaging. 2. The end of the curve is determined by the interrupting rating of the circuit breaker. 3. With zone-selective interlocking ON, short- time delay utilized, and no restraining signal, the maximum unrestrained short-time delay time band applies regardless of the setting. 4. Total clearing times shown include the response times of the trip unit, the circuit breaker opening, and the extinction of current. 5. For withstand circuit breaker, instantaneous can be turned OFF. See trip curve 613-7 on page 134 for instantaneous trip curve. See table on page 138 for instantaneous override values. 6. See Trip Curve 613-4 on page 132 for long- time pickup and delay trip curve. B4 8 0 9 5 - 6 1 3 - 0 5 . e p s 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 189 of 234 © 2001–2009 Schneider Electric All Rights Reserved PowerPact® M-, P- and R-Frame, and Compact® NS630b–NS3200 Circuit Breakers Trip Curves 134 08/2009 Micrologic 5.0/6.0 P-Frame, R-Frame and NS630b–NS3200 A/P/H Trip Units Characteristic Trip Curve 1. 5 1 1 MULTIPLES OF SENSOR RATING (In) MULTIPLES OF SENSOR RATING (In) .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1. 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 10 0 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 10 0 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 6000 7000 8000 9000 5000 10000 .005 .006 .007 .008 .009 .01 .015 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 .08 .09 .1 .005 .006 .007 .008 .009 .01 .015 .02 .03 .04 .05 .06 .07 .08 .09 .1 .15 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1 .15 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 150 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000 TI M E I N S E C O N D S CYCLE21 1 CYCLE 150 INSTANTANEOUS PICKUP x In 10 x 2 x 3 x 4 x 6 x 8 x 12 x 15 x Curve No. 0613TC0007 Drawing No. B48095-613-07 Micrologic 5.0/6.0 Trip Units Instantaneous Pickup, 2X to 15X and OFF The time-current curve information is to be used for application and coordination purposes only. Curves apply from -30°C to +60°C (- Notes: 1. The end of the curve is determined by the interrupting rating of the circuit breaker. 2. Total clearing times shown include the response times of the trip unit, the circuit breaker opening, and the extinction of current. 3. The instantaneous region of the trip curve shows maximum total clearing times. Actual clearing times in this region can vary depending on the circuit breaker mechanism design and other factors. The actual clearing time can be considerably faster than indicated. Contact your local sales office for additional information. 4. For a withstand circuit breaker, instantaneous can be turned OFF. See trip curve 613-7 on page 134 for the instantaneous trip curve. See table on page 138 for the instantaneous override values. 5. See trip curve 613-4 on page 132 and trip curve 613-5 on page 133 for long-time pickup, long-time delay, short-time pickup and short- time delay trip curves. B4 8 0 9 5 - 6 1 3 - 0 7 . e p s 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 190 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 191 of 234 NOTE: GAS SUPPLY PRESSURE AND VOLUME MUST MEET REQUIREMENTS TO ALLOW OPERATION OF THE GENERATOR AT 100% LOAD. PLEASE SEE GENERATOR DATA SHEETS. 800A CIRCUIT BREAKER MOUNTED RIGHT 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 192 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 193 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 194 of 234 INNOVATIVE EXHAUST SOLUTIONS, INC. TM ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED 26 www.inExhaust.com | Phone 402.322.7022 | Fax 402.322.7032 | sales@inExhaust.com Rev030421-A *Contact factory for details. 900C Dimensions (inches) Typical Attenuation Curve 900C Series Silencer Octave Band IN S E R T I O N L O S S I N D E C I B E L S (R e f . 0 . 0 0 0 2 M i c r o b a r s ) CENTER FREQUENCY, Hz 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 Connection Options Additional Options Standard Connections 125/150# ANSI Pattern flanged inlet and outlet. Side inlet, end outlet. (Style 2)• Leak testing – per request, fee applicable • Stainless steel *Other Options Flanged connections can be replaced with ID cuff, OD tube, NPT, etc. * Application Standard Build • Engineered for areas where ambient noise level requirements are very low and a high degree of silencing is required. • Suited for heavy-duty stationary and mobile applications in both Critical & Residential. • May be installed in any position. • Typical Attenuation: 25 to 33 dBA • Internally unpacked silencer. • High heat black finish. • Fully-welded, heavy-duty carbon steel. Style 2 D øB H F øA Style 1 C øA øB Style 3 E J G H F øB øA Cylindrical Series Critical Grade 900C Part Number A Outlet B DIA C OAL D OAL E OAL F MIN F MAX G MIN G MAX H/J Dims WT 900C2-02 2 8 31 28 25 4 11 4 9 7 35 900C2-025 2.5 8 41 38 35 4 16 4 12 7 48 900C2-03 3 10 41 38 35 5 16 5 13 8 60 900C2-035 3.5 10 52 49 46 5 22 5 17 8 80 900C2-04 4 14 53 50 47 6 22 6 17 10 105 900C2-05 5 16 61 57 54 7 25 7 19 12 140 900C2-06 6 18 73 69 66 8 31 8 23 13 205 900C2-08 8 24 75 71 67 10 29 10 24 16 310 900C2-10 10 26 100 96 92 11 46 11 30 17 450 900C2-12 12 30 100 96 92 12 43 12 32 19 610 900C2-14 14 36 138 134 131 15 58 15 47 22 1,030 900C2-16 16 42 139 135 132 16 56 16 51 25 1,350 900C2-18 18 48 143 139 134 19 56 19 49 29 1,630 900C2-20 20 48 166 162 158 20 67 20 55 29 1,910 900C2-22 22 54 168 164 161 22 67 22 60 32 2,200 900C2-24 24 60 170 167 163 24 68 24 59 35 2,875 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 195 of 234 DATE: PAGE: AUTHOR: DRAWING NAME: D.BAUERCUMMINS SALES AND SERVICE CONNECTICUT, INDIANA, KENTUCKY, MAINE, MARYLAND, MASSACHUSETTS, MICHIGAN,NEW HAMPSHIRE, NEW JERSEY, NEW YORK, OHIO, PENNSYLVANIA, RHODE ISLAND, WEST VIRGINIA 10MARCH2021 J20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 TB1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 PCCNET- A PCCNET- B PCCNET SHIELD/B+ RETURN READY TO LOAD B+ OUTPUT (5A) CONFIGURABLE RELAY 1-A CONFIGURABLE RELAY 1-B CONFIGURABLE RELAY 2-A CONFIGURABLE RELAY 2-B REMOTE START RETURN REMOTE START CONFIGURABLE INPUT 1 CONFIGURABLE INPUT COMMON CONFIGURABLE INPUT 2 REMOTE E-STOP RETURN REMOTE E-STOP RETURN CHASSIS GROUND B+ RETURN SWITCHED B+ LOW SIDE DRIVER B+ RETURN B+ RETURN B+ INPUT B+INPUT STARTER DISCONNECT SUPPLY B+ RETURN RELAY COIL B+ SUPPLY FSO RELAY DRIVER STARTER RELAY DRIVER N/A B+ INPUT B+ INPUT ALT FLASH INPUT 1 2 3 4 TB7 GEN BUS OR UTILITY L1 NEUTRAL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 TB3 GROUND S-CAN CAN L S-CAN CAN H CONFIGURABLE OUTPUT 20 N/A FIRST START ARBITRATION FIRST START RETURN S-CAN ISOLATED GROUND CONFIGURABLE OUTPUT 22 STATUS TRANSFER INHIBIT/CONFIGURABLE INPUT 20 RETRANSFER INHIBIT/CONFIGURABLE INPUT 21 CONFIGURABLE OUTPUT 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 TB8 DISCRETE RETURN DELAYED OFF SW B+ RELAY CTL 2 REMOTE FAULT RESET (WAKE UP) CONFIGURABLE INPUT 13 LOAD DUMP DISCRETE INPUT RETURN DISCRETE RETURN CONFIGURABLE INPUT 14 CONFIGURABLE OUTPUT 4 CONFIGURABLE OUTPUT 3 DISCRETE INPUT RETURN START TYPE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 TB9 KW LOAD SET POINT/CONFIGURABLE ANALOG INPUT 1 KVAR LOAD SET POINT/CONFIGURABLE ANALOG INPUT 2 VOLTAGE BIAS OUTPUT/ CONFIGURABLE ANALOG OUTPUT 2 SPEED BIAS OUTPUT/CONFIGURABLE ANALOG OUTPUT 1 KW LOAD SHARE - KVAR LOAD SHARE - ANALOG RETURN KW LOAD SHARE + LOAD SHARE SHIELD KVAR LOAD SHARE + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 TB5 GENSET CB CLOSE CONTROL N/A GENSET CB OPEN CONTROL GENSET CB OPEN CONTROL RETURN UTILITY CB CLOSE CONTROL RETURN GENSET CB CLOSE CONTROL RETURN UTILITY CB OPEN CONTROL UTILITY OPEN CONTROL RETURN UTILITY CB CLOSE CONTROL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 TB10 RETURN UTILITY CB POS A SWITCH UTILITY CB POS B/CONFIGURABLE INPUT 23 UTILITY CB TRIPPED SWITCH GENSET CB POS A SWITCH GENSET CB INHIBIT/CONFIGURABLE INPUT 28 UTILITY SINGLE MODE VERIFY/CONFIGURABLE INPUT 29 RETURN GENSET CB POS B/CONFIGURABLE INPUT 26 RETURN GENSET CB TRIPPED SWITCH SYNC ENABLE/CONFIGURABLE INPUT 30 UTILITY CB INHIBIT/CONFIGURABLE INPUT 25 LOAD DEMAND STOP/CONFIGURABLE INPUT 31 EXTENDED PARALLEL/CONFIGURABLE INPUT 32 RETURN RETURN 14 15 16 17 GEN BUS OR UTILITY L2 GEN BUS OR UTILITY L3 TB15 1 2 3 4 5 RETURN REMOTE START RS 485- A RS 485- B PCCNET SYSTEM WAKE UP PCC 3.X 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 CONFIGURABLE RELAY 1-A REMOTE START CHASSIS GROUND B+ RETURN SWITCHED B+ LOW SIDE DRIVER B+ RETURN B+ RETURN B+ INPUT B+INPUT STARTER DISCONNECT SUPPLY B+ RETURN RELAY COIL B+ SUPPLY FSO RELAY DRIVER STARTER RELAY DRIVER N/A B+ INPUT B+ INPUT ALT FLASH INPUT ANALOG RETURN 1 2 3 4 5 RETURN REMOTE START RS 485- A RS 485- B PCCNET SYSTEM WAKE UP CONFIGURABLE INPUT 12 CONFIGURABLE INPUT 5 CONFIGURABLE INPUT 6 DISCRETE INPUT RETURN DISCRETE INPUT RETURN DISCRETE INPUT RETURN CONTROL BOARD NOTES: 1.) LONWORKS RECOMMEND CABLE TYPE: BELDEN 8471 UNSHIELDED TWISTED PAIR 2.) PCCNET AND RS485 RECOMMENDED CABLE TYPE: BELDEN 9729 SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR 3.) MODLON GATEWAY TO PC500-550 CONNECTION CABLE CPG PN: A040T087 4.) USB HOST IS USED TO ATTACH AN EXTERNAL USB DRIVE TO EXTEND THE PC 500-550 MEMORY 5.) SD CARD SLOT IS USED TO EXTEND THE PC 500-550 MEMORY 6.) EITHER USB HOST OR SD CARD CAN BE USED AT A TIME, NOT BOTH 7.) USB DEVICE IS USED BY A PC TO SETUP THE PC 500-550 8.) PULL 20% MORE CONDUCTORS FOR SPARES POWER COMMAND 500/550 TB1 1 B+ 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 GND GND CGND ANL IN + ANL IN - DIN 1 DIN 2 DOUT-C DOUT-N/O DOUT-N/C DOUT-C DOUT-N/O DOUT-N/C TB2 1RS 485 1 + 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 RS 485 1 - RS 485 GND CGND NOT USED RS 485 2 + RS 485 2 - RS 485 2 GND CGND USB HOST USB ETHER-SD DEVICE NET CARD RJ45 ETHERNET CONNECTION TO CUSTOMER LAN NETWORK 101 102 102 101 112A B 112A B NOTE 2 TB2 1GND 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REMOTE TEST TRANSFER INHIBIT LOAD SHED COMMON TB1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 B+ RMTC N/ON/C N/C N/O C AUXILIARY CONTACTS OTEC/OTIII 104 103 102 101 105 106 107 109 109 108 110 108 110 107 106 105 DAISY CHAIN REMOTE START AND B+/B- TO NEXT ATS 101 102 103 104 113 A B NOTE 2 102 101 114 102 TB2 1GND 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 REMOTE TEST TRANSFER INHIBIT LOAD SHED COMMON TB1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 B+ RMTC N/ON/C N/C N/O C AUXILIARY CONTACTS OTEC/OTIII 104 103 102 101 DAISY CHAIN REMOTE START AND B+/B- TO NEXT ATS 101 102 103 104 INT 3.X 9024 J2 1 2 3 4 5 B+ B- UNIVERSAL ANNUNCIATOR 300-5929-02 WU PCCNET DATA- A PCCNET DATA- B TB1 7 15 16 LOW FUEL LEVEL GROUND B+ 102 101 113A B 114 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 196 of 234 DATE: PAGE: AUTHOR: DRAWING NAME: D.BAUERCUMMINS SALES AND SERVICE B+ B- L N DC OUTPUT AC INPUT B+ B- TYPICAL FOR BATTERY CHARGER WALL MOUNTEDENGINE STARTER CUSTOMER SUPPLIED AC SOURCE, SITE SPECIFIC CONNECTICUT, INDIANA, KENTUCKY, MAINE, MARYLAND, MASSACHUSETTS, MICHIGAN,NEW HAMPSHIRE, NEW JERSEY, NEW YORK, OHIO, PENNSYLVANIA, RHODE ISLAND, WEST VIRGINIA TYP BATT CHARGER 9011 27SEPT2016 WIRE SIZE (AWG) DISTANCE IN FEET (ONE WAY) AB C CONTROL WIRING 2/ 3.5 AMP BATT CHG 10 AMP BATT CHG 24V 24V12V 12V 16 14 12 10 8 6 1000 1600 2400 4000 - - 90 50 -- 150 225 350 600 1000 80 125 200 300 500 20 30 50 80 125 5 10 15 25 40 D 12/15 AMP BATT CHG 24V 12V -- 20 30 50 80 125 5 10 15 25 40 E 20 AMP BATT CHG 24V 12V -- 30 50 80 15 25 40 -- -- 10 AMP 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 197 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 198 of 234 power.cummin s.com ©2022 Cummins Inc. AC-150 A019U079 (06/22) Specification Sheet Battery and Accessories Battery Specifications Battery Part Number Group Size CCA Reserve Capacity Battery Voltage Length Width Height Ship Weight lbs Quarts Electrolyte 0416-0579 24 420 70 Dry 12 10.2 6.6 8.9 20 6.0 0416-0579-01 24 420 70 Wet 12 10.2 6.6 8.9 36 6.0 0416-1330 24XL 810 146 Wet 12 10.3 9.0 6.6 43 5.9 0416-1051 26 530 80 Wet 12 8.2 6.8 8.1 31 3.7 0416-1040 31 800 160 Dry 12 13.0 6.8 9.4 65 4.2 0416-0796 31 725 150 Wet 12 12.7 6.0 9.3 62 4.2 0416-0980 31 1000 185 Wet 12 13.0 6.8 9.5 59 4.2 A045P632 34 850 NA Wet 12 10.3 6.6 8.0 NA NA 0416-1291 34 800 100 Sealed 12 10.0 6.9 7.9 38 4.0 A030Y976 4D 1050 290 Wet 12 20.7 8.7 10.0 100 NA 0416-0439 8D 1400 430 Dry 12 20.8 10.7 9.5 110 16.0 0416-1264 8D 730 420 Dry 12 20.7 10.8 9.5 110 16.0 0416-1105 8D 1400 430 Wet 12 20.8 10.8 9.5 125 16.0 A062X621 24 800 135 Wet 12 10.1 6.8 8.7 42 N/A A062X662 34 800 120 Wet 12 10.2 6.9 7.9 38 N/A 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 199 of 234 cummins.com ©2022 Cummins Inc. | AC-150 A019U079 (06/22) 34 A062X662 800 C100 N6 A 24 34 A062X621 A062X662 800 800 850 12 12 2 * First line refers to standby battery size and the second line refers to cold starting battery size for C20 N6 – C40 N6. Application – Gas Continued Model Current Spec Battery Size* Supported Part Number* Battery CCA* Genset Minimum CCA Battery Voltage Starting (Genset) Voltage Required Battery Quantity* C125 N6 A 34 A045P632 A045P632 850 850 850 12 12 1 2 C150 N6 A 34 A045P632 A045P632 850 850 850 12 12 1 2 GGHG N 30H-31 0416-0796 0416-0980 725 725 1000 600 12 12 1 GGHH N 30H-31 0416-0796 0416-0980 725 725 1000 600 12 12 1 GGHJ A 30H-31 0416-0796 0416-0980 725 725 1000 600 12 12 1 * First line refers to standby battery size and the second line refers to cold starting battery size for C20 N6 – C150 N6. Reference for battery size supported part number, battery cold cranking amps, and required battery quantity. Battery Accessories Battery Racks (not recommended for mounting on skids). Part Number Description 0416-0527 20.5” x 11.0” (includes how down brackets) 0416-0475 14.5” x 9.3” (loose rack, not intended for anchoring) 0541-0798 13.7” x 9.7” (includes hold down bracket A034F027 21.8” x 14.3” (includes hold down brackets) Battery Heater Increases battery starting capability in lower ambient temperatures. Heater Kit Temperature Range Voltage AC Watts Instruction Sheet Critical Component 0333-0469 Pre-set to maintain 80o F 120 200 N/A 0333-0469-01 0333-0770 65 o F on; 80o F off 120 50 G744 NA – as purchased 0541-0555 40o F / 70o F setting 120 120 C587 0333-0636 Image 1: 0333-0469 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 200 of 234 power.cummins.com ©2022 Cummins Inc. | NAAC-5602-EN PDA059Y464 (03/22) Specification Sheet Battery Charger A048G602 10 A 50/60 Hz A051H785 20 A 50/60 Hz Description Features Cummins® fully automatic battery chargers are constant voltage/constant current chargers incorporating a 4-stage charging algorithm. Designed for use in applications where battery life and reliability are important; these chargers, complete with built-in equalize charge capability, are ideal for stationary or portable starting battery charging service. To achieve optimum battery life, a 4-stage charging cycle is implemented. The four charging stages are constant current, high-rate taper charge, finishing charge, and maintaining charge. During the constant current cycle, the charger operates at maximum possible output in the fast charge mode. During the high-rate taper charge cycle the charger stays at fast charge voltage level until battery current acceptance falls to a portion of the chargers rated output. During the finishing charge cycle the charger operates at the float voltage and completes the battery charge. During the maintaining charge cycle the charger supplies only a few milliamps required by the battery to stay at peak capability. An optional temperature sensor (A043D534) may be used to adjust charging voltage based on temperature of the battery. Use of a battery temperature sensor helps to increase battery life by preventing over or under charging. The battery temperature sensor also protects the battery from overheating. Temperature compensation sensor is required for all applications when battery charger and battery are located in different temperature or battery heater is being used. Battery chargers are field-configurable for charging either 12 or 24 VDC battery systems at 50/60 Hz operation. Simple jumper selectors enable selection of output voltage and battery type. Protection – Surge protected to IEEE and EN standards. All models include single pole cartridge type fuses mounted on the printed circuit board to protect against input or output overcurrent. Easy Installation – Clearly marked terminal blocks and panel knockouts provide convenient connections of input and output leads. User Display – Output voltage and current, fault information and status are indicated on the front panel. Includes precision ammeter and voltmeter. Monitoring – Status LED indicators are provided to show the condition of the charger. LED’s on the right side of the monitor indicate operational functions for Temperature Compensation active (Green), AC on (Green), Float (Green) or Boost (Amber) mode, as well as Battery Fault (Red). LED’s on the left side of the monitor illuminate (in Red) when Charger fail, High or Low VDC or AC fail occur. Adjustable Float Voltage – Float voltage can be set, using easy to understand jumpers, for optimum battery performance and life. Construction – NEMA-1 (IP20) corrosion resistant aluminium enclosure designed for wall mounting. Faults – The charger senses and annunciates the following fault conditions: AC power loss, battery overvoltage, battery under voltage, battery fault conditions and charger failure. Includes an individual 30 volt/2-amp isolated contact for each alarm. Vibration Resistant Design – complies with UL991 class B vibration resistance requirements. Listed – C-UL listed to UL 1236 CSA standard 22.2 No 107.2-M89. Suited for flooded and AGM lead acid and NiCd batteries in generator set installations. Warranty – 5 year CPG warranty. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 201 of 234 For more information contact your local Cummins distributor or visit power.cummins.com ©2022 Cummins Inc. All rights reserved. Cummins is a registered trademark of Cummins Inc. PowerCommand, AmpSentry, InPower and “Our energy working for you.” are trademarks of Cummins Inc. Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. Specifications are subject to change without notice. NAAC-5602-EN PDA059Y464 (03/22) Status and Fault LED Field Selectable Jumper Specifications Performance and Physical Characteristics Output: Nominal voltage 12VDC* or 24VDC Float voltage – 12VDC batteries 12.87, 13.08, 13.31, 13.50*, 13.62, 14.30 Float voltage – 24VDC batteries 25.74, 26.16, 26.62, 27.00*, 27.24, 28.60 Equalize-voltage 6.5% above float voltage sensing Output voltage regulation ±0.5% (1/2%) line and load regulation Maximum output current 10 or 20 amps nominal Equalize charging Battery interactive auto-boost Input: Voltage AC 120, 208, 240 ±10% Frequency 60/50 Hz +5% Approximate net weight: 10A: 25 lbs. (11.36 Kg) 20A: 50 lbs. (22.68 Kg) Approximate dimensions: height x width x depth-in 10A: 12.50" x 7.66" x 6.50"(318 x 195 x 165 mm) 20A: 13.06" x 13.95" x 6.83"(332 x 354 x1 73 mm) Ambient temperature operation: At full rated output - - 4 °F to 104 °F (-20 °C to 40 °C) Note: 1. Battery charger comes with default settings of 12VDC and 13.50/27.00VDC float voltage and can be changed to the battery manufacture recommendations. Replacement printed circuit board and f uses are identified in the Owner’s Manual (10A: A050S537 and 20A: A051X126) which resides in Quick Serve On-Line. Service parts can be purchased through the Memphis Distribution Center. The PC board replacement instruction sheet (10A: A052N073, 20A: A053W929) and service manual (A050D829) is also available. 2. Installation and application must comply with “section 4.5.3 batteries and battery charger” of application guide T- 030 (Liquid Cooled Generator Set Application Manual A040S369). Caution: 1. Higher input voltages (i.e. 480VAC or 600VAC) can be applied if a transformer with a 120VAC-240VAC output is installed. Higher input voltages (i.e. 480VAC or 600VAC) can be applied if a transformer with a 120VAC-240VAC output is installed. For voltages higher than 240 VAC, stepdown transformer must be used. Review the respective Owner/Installation manual A050S537 for 10Amp and A051X126 20A chargers for supplier recommended stepdown transformer requirements. 2. 10Amp battery charger is recommended for genset applications with 1 or 2 factory provided batteries. 20Amp battery charger is recommended for Cummins Genset applications with 3 or 4 factory provided batteries. Please consider the auxiliary DC loads connected to the genset batteries and size this charger as per the T-030 application guide to prevent misapplication issues. 3. Back feed to a utility system can cause electrocution and/or property damage. Do not connect generator sets to any building electrical system except through an approved device or after building main switch is open. 4. For professional use only. Must be installed by a qualified service technician. Improper installation presents hazards of electrical shock and improper operation, resulting in severe personal injury and/or property damage. 5. Use this charger for charging LEAD-ACID or LIQUID ELECTROLYTE NICKEL-CADMIUM batteries only. Do not use this battery charger for charging dry cells, alkaline, lithium, nickel-metal hydride, or sealed nickel-cadmium batteries that are commonly used with home appliances. These batteries may burst and cause injuries to persons and damage to property. 6. Do not parallel these battery chargers with any other charging system. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 202 of 234 power.cummins.com ©2017 Cummins Inc. | S-1472 (02/22) Specification sheet PowerCommand® annunciator discrete input or PCCNet Description Features The Universal Annunciator Module provides visual and audible indication of up to 20 separate alarm or status conditions, based on discrete (relay) inputs or network inputs. Each LED can be controlled by either a discrete wire input or by a signal on the PCCNet network sent from an external device, such as a PCC1301 or PCC2100 (version 2.4 or later) control. In addition to the LEDs, the annunciator can control four custom relays based on signals received over the PCCNet. When one of the annunciator’s discrete inputs is activated, the annunciator will broadcast that information over the network. By taking advantage of the network, discrete inputs and custom relays, the annunciator can be used as expanded I/O for a genset controller. Easily installed in a location to give immediate notification of an alarm or warning status. Designed to give operating/monitoring personnel quick-glance status information. The module directly senses battery voltage to provide green/yellow/red alarm and status information for that parameter. Genset controller complies with NFPA level two requirements when used with the display but without the annunciator panel. When used with the annunciator it meets NFPA level one requirements (Emergency and Standby power systems). The annunciator module can also be used for monitoring of transfer switch or other equipment status. • Visual and audible warnings of up to 20 separate alarm or status conditions. • LEDs can be controlled either via PCCNet or discrete input. • Status of discrete inputs is broadcast on network. • Four custom relays can be controlled over the PCCNet network. • Configurable LED color (red, yellow or green) and selectable horn operation allows maximum flexibility. • Standard NFPA 110 label, field configurable for other alarm status and conditions. • Each audible alarm is annunciated, regardless of the number of existing alarm conditions displayed. • Sealed membrane panel design provides environmental protection for internal components and is easy to clean. • Configurable for negative (ground) input or positive input. • Integral DC voltage sensing. • Flush or surface mount provisions. • UL Listed and labeled; CSA certified; CE and UKCA marked. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 203 of 234 power.cummins.com ©2017 Cummins Inc. | S-1472 (02/22) Specifications Signal requirements Positive - Input impedance is 1.82 kOhms to ground; maximum input voltage = 31 VDC. Negative - Input impedance is 1.82 kOhms to Bat+: inputs are at Bat+ level when open. Sink/source current threshold for detection - 150 Ua minimum, 3 mA maximum. Typical conductor size: 16 ga for 304.8 m (1000 ft) Max conductor size for terminal: 12 ga Relay outputs 0.2 A at 125 VAC and 1 A at 30 VDC Network connections Use Belden 9729 two pair, stranded, shielded 24 AWG twisted pair cable for all PCCNet connections. Total network length cannot exceed 1219 m (4000 ft). Up to 20 nodes can be connected to the network. Note: Any communications wire connected to the generator set should be stranded cable. Power Maximum consumption: 15 watts Battery voltage Functional range - Audible and visual conditions operational from 6.5 to 31 VDC. Low voltage setting - 12.0 VDC for 12 Volt nominal systems; 24.0 for 24 Volt nominal systems. High voltage setting - 16.0 Volt for 12 Volt nominal systems; 32.0 Volt for 24 Volt nominal systems. Alarm horn Sound level: 90 dB at 30 cm Physical Weight (with enclosure): 1.4 kg (3.0 lbs) Temperature -20 °C to +70 °C (-4 °F to +158 °F) Humidity 10% to 95% RH (non-condensing) Default lamp configurations Can be configured for current NFPA 110 standard or as a replacement for Legacy (pre-2001) NFPA 110 annunciator (300-4510 or 300 4511) NFPA 110 Lamp Description Color Horn Flash DS1 Customer fault 1 Green No No DS2 Customer fault 2 Amber No No DS3 Customer fault 3 Red No No DS4 Genset supplying load Amber No No DS5 Charger AC failure Amber Yes No DS6 Low coolant level Amber Yes No DS7 Low fuel level Red Yes No DS8 Check generator set Amber No No DS9 Not in auto Red Yes Yes DS10 Generator set running Amber No No DS11 High battery voltage Amber Yes No DS12 Low battery voltage Red Yes No DS13 Weak battery Red Yes No DS14 Fail to start Red Yes No DS15 Low coolant temp Red Yes No DS16 Pre-high engine temp Amber Yes No DS17 High engine temp Red Yes No DS18 Pre-low oil pressure Red Yes No DS19 Low oil pressure Red Yes No DS20 Overspeed Red Yes No 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 204 of 234 power.cummins.com ©2017 Cummins Inc. | S-1472 (02/22) Typical installation 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 205 of 234 For more information contact your local Cummins distributor or visit power.cummins.com ©2017 Cummins Inc. All rights reserved. Cummins is a registered trademark of Cummins Inc. PowerCommand, AmpSentry, InPower an d “Our energy working for you.” are trademarks of Cummins Inc. Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. Specifications are subject to change without notice. S-1472 (02/22) Dimensions Ordering information Part number Description 0300-5929-01 Panel mount 0300-5929-02 Panel with enclosure 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 206 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 207 of 234 POWERCOMMAND® OTEC TRANSFER SWITCH POWERCOMMAND® 40 CONTROL | OPEN TRANSITION | 40 A –1200 A AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH DESCRIPTION The OTEC series transfer switch provides the basic features typically required for primary source and generator set monitoring, generator set starting and lS-1271oad transfer functions for emergency standby power applications. They are suitable for use in emergency, legally required, and optional standby circuits in commercial and light industrial applications. The OTEC transfer switch features the new PowerCommand® 40 control with a comprehensive feature list to suit a wide variety of ATS applications. FEATURES PowerCommand® 40-01 control – A fully featured microprocessor-based control with LCD digital display and tactile-feel soft-switches for easy operation and screen navigation. Control highlights include Modbus communication, front panel PC software configuration. Advanced features include, three phase sensing on both sources, manual restore to S1, synch check, and event logging capability. Please see the S-6560 PowerCommand® 40-01 control specification sheet for the full description, benefits and features. Programmed transition – Open transition timing can be adjusted to completely disconnect the load from both sources for a programmed time period, as recommended by NEMA MG-1 for transfer of inductive loads. Advanced transfer switch mechanism – Unique bi- directional linear actuator provides virtually frictionless constant force, straight-line transfer switch action during automatic operation. Positive interlocking – Mechanical and electrical interlocking prevent source-to- source connection through the power or control wiring. Main contacts – Heavy-duty silver alloy contacts used with multi-leaf arc chutes are rated for motor loads or total system load transfer. They require no routine contact maintenance. Continuous load current not to exceed 100% of switch rating and tungsten loads not to exceed 30% of switch rating. Ease of service and access – Single-plug harness connection and compatible terminal markings simplify servicing. Access space is ample. Door-mounted controls are field- programmable; no special tools are required. Complete product line – Cummins is a single source supplier with a wide range of equipment, accessories and services to suit virtually any backup power application. Warranty and service – Products are backed by a comprehensive warranty and a worldwide network of distributors with factory-trained service technicians. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 208 of 234 TRANSFER SWITCH MECHANISM ▪ Transfer switch mechanism is electrically operated and mechanically held in the Source 1 and Source 2 positions. The transfer switch incorporates electrical and mechanical interlocks to prevent inadvertent interconnection of the sources. ▪ Independent break-before-make action is used for both 3-pole and 4-pole simultaneously switched neutral. This design allows use of sync check operation when required, or control of the operating speed of the transfer switch for proper transfer of motor and rectifier-based loads (programmed transition feature). ▪ True 4-pole switching allows for proper ground (earth) fault sensing and consistent, reliable operation for the life of the transfer switch. The neutral poles of the transfer switch have the same ratings as the phase poles and are operated by a common crossbar mechanism, eliminating the possibility of incorrect neutral operation at any point in the operating cycle, or due to failure of a neutral operator. ▪ Electrical interlocks prevent simultaneous closing signals to normal and emergency contacts and interconnection of normal and emergency sources through the control wiring. ▪ High pressure silver alloy contacts resist burning and pitting. Separate arcing surfaces further protect the main contacts. Contact wear is reduced by multiple leaf arc chutes that cool and quench the arcs. Barriers separate the phases to prevent interphase flashover. A transparent protective cover allows visual inspection while inhibiting inadvertent contact with energized components. ▪ Switch mechanism, including contact assemblies, is UL 1008 certified to verify suitability for applications requiring high endurance switching capability for the life of the transfer switch. Withstand and closing ratings are validated using the same set of contacts, further demonstrating the robust nature of the design. SPECIFICATIONS Voltage rating Up to 600 V AC, 50 or 60 Hz. Arc interruption Multiple leaf arc chutes provide dependable arc interruption. Neutral bar A full current-rated neutral bar with lugs is standard on enclosed 3-pole transfer switches. Auxiliary contacts Two isolated contacts (one for each source) indicating switch position are provided for customer use. Contacts are normally open, and close to indicate connection to the source. Wired to terminal block for easy access. Rated at 10 A Continuous and 250 V AC maximum. Operating temperature -22 ˚F (-30 ˚C) to 140 ˚F (60 ˚C) Storage temperature -40 ˚F (-40 ˚C) to 140 ˚F (60 ˚C) Humidity Up to 95 % relative, non-condensing Altitude Up to 10,000 ft (3,000 m) without derating Surge withstand ratings Voltage surge performance and testing in compliance with the requirements of IEEE C62.41 (Category B3) and IEEE C62.45. Total transfer time (source-to-source) Will not exceed 6 cycles at 60 Hz with normal voltage applied to the actuator and without programmed transition enabled. Manual operation* Transfer switch mechanisms are equipped with means to manually transfer. All sources must be de-energized before manual operation is attempted. *See Operator Manual for further details. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 209 of 234 TRANSITION MODES Open delayed transition – In this transition mode the time required for the transfer switch to transfer between sources is adjustable so that the load-generated voltages decay to a safe level before connecting to an energized source. Recommended by NEMA MG-1 to prevent nuisance tripping breakers and load damage. Adjustable 0.5 secs-10 minutes, and default 0.5 seconds. Open in-phase translation – Initiates open transition transfer when in-phase monitor senses both sources are in phase (voltage, phase and frequency). Operates in a break-before-make sequence. Includes ability to enable programmed transition as a backup. The module waits indefinitely for synchronization unless the ‘Return to programmed transition’ function is active in which case after 2 minutes it performs a programmed delayed transfer. UL 1008 WITHSTAND AND CLOSING RATINGS (WCR) The transfer switches listed below must be protected by circuit breakers or fuses. Referenced drawings include detailed listings of specific breakers or fuse types that must be used with the respective transfer switches. Consult with your distributor/dealer to obtain the necessary drawings. Withstand and Closing Ratings (WCR) are stated in symmetrical RMS amperes. BREAKER PROTECTION MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCCB) PROTECTION SPECIAL CIRCUIT BREAKER PROTECTION Frame Amperage rating (A) With specific manufacturers MCCB (kA at 480V) With specific manufacturers MCCB (kA at 600V) Max MCCB ratings (A) Drawing reference With specific Current limiting breakers (kA at 600V) Max. Current limiting breakers CLB rating (A) Drawing reference A 40, 70, 125 (3-pole only) 14 14 225 A050J441 200 225 A048J566 40, 70, 125 (4-pole only) 30 30 400 A048E949 200 400 A051D533 B 150, 225, 260 30 30 400 A048E949 200 400 A051D533 C 300, 400, 600 65 65 1200 A056M829 200 1200 A048J564 D 800, 1000 65 50 1400 A056M821 200 1400 A048J562 E 1200 85 65 1600 A056M825 200 1600 A048P186 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 210 of 234 FUSE PROTECTION Frame Amperage rating (A) WCR with current limiting fuses (kA) Fuse size and type Drawing reference A 40, 70, 125 (3 and 4-pole) 200 200 A, Class: J, RK1, RK5, T A050J441 B 150, 225, 260 200 1200 A Class L or T, or 600A class J, RK1, RK5 A048E949 C 300, 400, 600 200 1200 A Class L or T, or 600A class J, RK1, RK5 A056M829 D 800, 1000 200 2000 A Class L or 1200 A Class T or 600 A Class J, RK1, RK5 A056M821 E 1200 200 2000 A Class L or 1200 A Class T or 600 A Class J, RK1, RK5 A056M825 *All WCR values are at 600 V TIME BASED RATINGS: 0.05S (3-CYCLES AT 60 HZ) Frame Amperage rating (A) WCR (kA at Vmax and below) Max. MCCB rating (A) Drawing reference C 300, 400, 600 25 at 600 V 1200 A056M829 D 800, 1000 35 at 600 V 1400 A056M821 E 1200 42 at 600 V 1600 A056M825 TRANSFER SWITCH LUG CAPACITIES Frame Amperage rating (A) Cables per phase Size A 40, 70, 125 3-pole 1 #12 AWG-2/0 40 4-pole 1 #12 AWG-2/0 70, 125 4-pole 1 #6 AWG – 300MCM B 150, 225 1 #6 AWG – 300MCM 260 1 #6 AWG – 400MCM C 300, 400 2 1 cable of 3/0 to 600MCM OR 2 cables 3/0 to 250MCM 600 2 250 – 500 MCM D 800, 1000 4 250 – 500 MCM E 1200 4 #2 AWG to 600 MCM standard (feature N045) 1/0 to 750 MCM optional (feature N066) Compression Lug Adapter optional (feature N032) *All lugs 90°C rated and accept copper or aluminum wire unless indicated otherwise. Refer to the latest NFPA 70 Article 310 - Conductors for general wiring for the ampacity calculations. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 211 of 234 ENCLOSURE The transfer switch and control are wall-mounted in a key-locking enclosure. Wire bend space complies with 2017 NEC. DIMENSIONS – TRANSFER SWITCH IN UL TYPE 1 ENCLOSURE Frame Amperage rating (A) Height Width Depth Weight in mm in mm in mm lb kg A 40, 70, 125 3-pole 27 686 20.5 521 12 305 82 37 40, 70, 125 4-pole 35.5 902 26 660 16 406 165 75 B 150, 225 35.5 902 26 660 16 406 165 75 260 43.5 1105 28.5 724 16 406 170 77 C 300, 400, 600 54 1372 25.5 648 18 457 225 102 D 800, 1000 68 1727 30 762 19.5 495 360 163 E 1200 90 2286 39 991 27 698 730 331 DIMENSIONS – TRANSFER SWITCH IN UL TYPE 3R, 4, 4X, OR 12 ENCLOSURE Frame Amperage rating (A) Height Width Depth Weight Cabinet Type in mm in mm in mm lb kg A 40, 70, 125 3-pole 34 864 26.5 673 12.5 318 125 57 3R, 12, 4 46 1168 32 813 16 406 255 116 4X 40, 70, 125 4-pole 42.5 1080 30.5 775 16 406 215 98 3R, 12, 4 46 1168 32 813 16 406 255 116 4X B 150, 225 42.5 1080 30.5 775 16 406 215 98 3R, 12, 4 46 1168 32 813 16 406 255 116 4X 260 46 1168 32 813 16 406 255 116 3R, 12, 4, 4X C 300, 400, 600 59 1499 27.5 699 16.5 419 275 125 3R, 12, 4 73.5 1867 32.5 826 19.5 495 410 186 4X D 800, 1000 73.5 1867 32.5 826 19.5 495 410 186 3R, 12, 4, 4X E 1200 90 2286 39 991 27 698 730 331 3R, 12, 4, 4X 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 212 of 234 ENCLOSURE ACCESS FOR CABLE INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE All frames allow for top, side, and bottom cable entry. NEC Requires Minimum 36” Front Access. Additional front clearance is needed to remove the mechanism. Refer to the outline drawing. OTEC DRAWING PART NUMBERS Outline Drawing Frame Amperage rating (A) Type 1 Type 3R & 12 Type 4 Type 4X Open construction A 40, 70, 125 3-pole 0310-0544 0310-0453 0310-0445 0500-4184 A065S429 40, 70, 125 (4-pole) 0500-4896 0500-4896 B 150, 225 0310-0414 0310-0454 0310-0446 0500-4184 260 0310-0540 0310-0455 0310-0447 0500-4184 C 300, 400, 600 0310-1307 0310-1315 0310-1316 0500-4185 D 800, 1000 0310-0417 0310-0457 0310-0449 0500-4185 E 1200 A065S431 A065S432 A065S430 WIRING DIAGRAM PART NUMBERS Wiring Diagram Frame Amperage rating (A) Utility to Genset (120 – 480 V) Utility to Genset (600 V) Interconnection Utility to Genset, Open Construction (120 – 480 V) Utility to Genset, Open Construction (600 V) A 40, 70, 125 3- pole A065K034 A065H782 A065H780 A065H783 A065H784 40, 70, 125 (4-pole) B 150, 225 260 C 300, 400, 600 D 800, 1000 A065H781 E 1200 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 213 of 234 SUBMITTAL DETAIL Model ▪ 40, 70, 125 A, (3- and 4-pole) ▪ 150, 225, 260 A ▪ 300, 400, 600 A ▪ 800, 1000 A ▪ 1200 A Poles ▪ A028 Poles – 3 (solid neutral) ▪ A029 Poles – 4 (switched neutral) Application ▪ A035 Utility-to-genset Frequency ▪ A044 60 Hz ▪ A045 50 Hz Phase ▪ A041 single phase, 2-wire or 3-wire ▪ A042 three phase, 3-wire or 4-wire Voltage ratings ▪ R020 120V ▪ R038 190V ▪ R021 208V ▪ R022 220V ▪ R023 240V ▪ R024 380V ▪ R025 416V ▪ R035 440 V ▪ R026 480 V ▪ R027 600 V Enclosure ▪ B001 Type 1: Indoor use, provides some protection against dirt (similar to IEC type IP30) ▪ B002 Type 3R: Intended for outdoor use, provides some protection from dirt, rain and snow (similar to IEC type IP34) ▪ B003 Type 4: Indoor or outdoor use, provides some protection from wind-blown dust and water spray (similar to IEC type IP65) ▪ B004 open construction: no enclosure - includes automatic transfer switch and controls ▪ B010 Type 12: Indoor use, some protection from dust (similar to IEC type IP61). ▪ B025 Type 4X: Stainless steel, indoor or outdoor use, provides some protection from corrosion (similar to IEC Type IP65). Standards ▪ A046 UL 1008/CSA certification ▪ A080 IBC seismic certification Control voltage ▪ M033 12V, Genset starting voltage ▪ M034 24V, Genset starting voltage Control options ▪ M032 Elevator signal relay ▪ M081 MODBUS RS485 Communication module Auxiliary relays ▪ Relays are UL Listed, and factory installed. All relays provide (2) normally closed isolated contacts rated 10A @ 600 VAC. Relay terminals accept (1) 18 gauge to (2) 12-gauge wires per terminal. ▪ L101 24 VDC coil - installed, not wired (for customer use). ▪ L102 24 VDC coil - emergency position – relay energized when switch is in source 2 (emergency) position. ▪ L103 24 VDC coil - normal position - relay energized when switch is in source 1 (normal) position ▪ L201 12 VDC coil installed, not wired (for customer use) ▪ L202 12 VDC coil - emergency position – relay energized when switch is in source 2 (emergency) position ▪ L203 12 VDC coil - normal position - relay energized when switch is in source 1 (normal) position 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 214 of 234 Optional Cable Lugs ▪N032 Lug adapters, compression, ½ stab (1200A only) ▪N045 Cable lugs, mechanical, 600 MCM, 4 per pole (1200A only) ▪N066 Cable lugs, mechanical, 750 MCM, 4 per pole (1200A only) Miscellaneous ▪C027 Cover - guard ▪M003 Terminal block - 30 points (not wired) Warranty ▪G009 1-year, comprehensive ▪G007 5-years, comprehensive ▪G014 3-years, comprehensive ▪G015 10-years, comprehensive Shipping ▪A051 Packing - export box (800 – 1000 A) Request for quotation (RFQ) ▪Z555 Nonconfigurable spec [ETO] Accessories ▪AC-170 Accessories specification sheet 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 215 of 234 CODES AND STANDARDS All switches are UL 1008 Listed with UL 50E Type Rated cabinets and UL Listed CU-AL terminals. NEC® Suitable for use in emergency, legally required and Standby and Critical Operations Power Systems (COPS) applications per NEC 700, 701, 702 and 708. All switches comply with NEMA ICS 10. ISO® All switches are designed and manufactured in facilities certified to ISO 9001. All switches are certified to CSA C22.2 No. 178.1 switching of electrical energy in emergency or other systems, up to 600 VAC and 4 kA. IBC® All switches are certified to IBC 2018. All switches comply with IEEE 446 Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems. EMC Display controllers meet the following Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standards: ▪ EN 61000-6-2 Generic Immunity Standard for the Industrial Environment. ▪ EN 61000-6-4 Generic Emission Standard for the Industrial Environment. All switches comply with NFPA 70, 99 and 110 (Level 1). For more information, please contact your local Cummins distributor or visit cummins.com Our energy working for you.™ ©2022 Cummins Inc. S-6556 PD00000752 Rev. 8/22 All rights reserved. Cummins is a registered trademark of Cummins Inc. PowerCommand, AmpSentry, InPower and “Our energy working for you.” are trademarks of Cummins Inc. Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. Specifications are subject to change without notice. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 216 of 234 DESCRIPTION The PowerCommand® 40-01 Transfer Switch Control is a sophisticated microprocessor-based control with the basic features you need for primary source and generator set monitoring, generator set starting and load transfer functions for emergency standby power applications. The control human machine interface (HMI) includes a LCD display with tactile-feel soft-switches for easy operation and screen navigation. All data on the control can be viewed by scrolling through screens with a display scroll button. The control displays the current active fault, fault occurrences and time- ordered history of the 10 previous faults with respect to Real Time Clock Stamp and Engine Running Time. FEATURES Digital display – The PowerCommand® 40-01 offers a clear back-lit LCD 4-line text display, showing system status, contextual icons and warnings. The display is also equipped with 9 red and green LEDs indicating operational status. Modbus network communication – Modbus network communications capable. Optional Modbus RTU RS485 connection (1 serial port). Diagnostics and reporting – Detailed event logging with enhanced fault codes, alert lists, power event history, and diagnostic capability during service events and provides the ability to meet any reporting requirements. PC & Front Panel Configurations – The modules can be easily configured using the PC software. Selected front panel editing is also available. Ease of service and access – Built-in plug-and-play control with minimized point-to-point connections and compatible terminal markings simplify servicing. OTEC TRANSFER SWITCHES POWERCOMMAND® 40-01 TRANSFER SWITCH CONTROL 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 217 of 234 POWERCOMMAND® 40-01 TRANSFER SWITCH CONTROL SPEC SHEET HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) CAPABILITIES Tactile push button selects ‘Auto’ mode Tactile push button selects ‘Auto’ mode LED Indicates ‘Auto’ mode Tactile push button selects ‘Manual’ mode Tactile push button selects ‘Stop’ mode Common Alarm Status LED LED indicates source available Tactile push button transfers load to S2 Tactile push button transfers load to S1 Info button Display scroll button LED indicates source power connected Complete product line – Cummins is a single source supplier with full scope of power system solutions, integration and service capability, from parallelingto system level controls, switchgear and remote connectivity. Warranty and service – Products are backed by a comprehensive warranty and a worldwide network of distributors with factory-trained service technicians. Isometric (ISO) projection: front views 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 218 of 234 POWERCOMMAND® 40-01 TRANSFER SWITCH CONTROL SPEC SHEET CONTROL FUNCTIONS TRANSFER INHIBIT When transfer inhibit external input is active, the control does not automatically transfer the transfer switch to a standby source even when the preferred source fails. RETRANSFER INHIBIT When retransfer inhibit external input is active, the control does not automatically retransfer the transfer switch to a preferred source even when the preferred source returns. REAL TIME CLOCK This feature is used by the control for fault and event time stamping and as a reference for exerciser schedules and exception schedules. TEST – REMOTE Test feature allows the user to automatically test the standby source and the transfer switch. The test command can be issued from the remote source. The test has following types available: Remote Start On Load Remote Start Off Load PREFERRED SOURCE SELECTION Using this feature the user can swap the priority of the sources which are preferred and standby. ELEVATOR SIGNAL This optional feature allows an elevator connected to the system to come to a complete stop before the switch transfers. EXERCISER SCHEDULER The Scheduler allows the user to configure pre-set automatic starting and stopping of the Generator as well as stopping the ATS carrying out a transfer (when in Auto mode). BANK 1 / BANK 2 Each Bank of the Exercise Scheduler is used to give up to 8 scheduled runs per bank, 16 in total. This run schedule is configurable to repeat every 7 days (weekly) or every 28 days (monthly). Do Not Transfer, Off Load and On Load. Each scheduler bank configured differently either to weekly or monthly based exercises. SOURCE AVAILABILITY This feature monitors the frequency and voltage sensors on the preferred and standby sources to determineand declare the availability status of the two sources, irrespective of which source is connected to the load. It declares the states as event codes. Preferred/Standby Available - active inactive. VOLTAGE SENSING 3-phase sensing on Source 1 and Source 2 (up to 600 Vac with no need for additional PTs). Plant battery voltage monitoring. ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY S2 Voltage L1-N S2 Voltage L-L S2 Frequency S1 Voltage L1-N S1 Voltage L-L S1 Frequency Battery voltage Current alarms with icons Event log Scheduler About 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 219 of 234 POWERCOMMAND® 40-01 TRANSFER SWITCH CONTROL SPEC SHEET TIME DELAYS The following adjustable time delays are built into the transfer switch control. External modules to accomplish these delays are not required. Start Delay (Also known as Time Delay Engine Start, TDES adjustable from 0 to 10 hours) Warming (Also known as Time Delay Normal to Emergency, TDNE adjustable from 0 to 1 hour) Elevator Delay (Also known as Time Delay Elevator, TDEL adjustable from 0 to 5 minutes) Non-sync Transfer Time (Also known as Time Delay Programmed Transition, TDPT adjustable from 0.5 s to 10 minutes) Return Delay (Also known as Time Delay Emergency to Normal, TDEN adjustable from 0 to 5 hours) Cooling (Also known as Time Delay Engine Cool-down, TDEC adjustable from 0 to 1 hour) LED INDICATOR LIGHTS Auto mode (RED) Auto with manual return to utility mode (RED) Test without load (RED) Test with load (RED) Source 1 available (GREEN) Source 2 available (GREEN) Source 1 connected to load (GREEN) Source 2 connected to load (GREEN) EVENT LOG The control displays information on up to 10 events displayed in chronological order, beginning with the most recent event, about either source. The event information shall include the following: Failure modes Warning Tests and exercises User-driven inputs (e.g., override, transfer inhibit) SUPPORTED APPLICATIONS APPLICATION TYPES Utility - Generator Set COMMUNICATIONS The PowerCommand® 40-01 Transfer Switch Control features an optional network communication module. Features include: Optional Modbus® RTU RS485 communication module (1 isolated serial port) USB port for service tool interface PROTECTION PHASE ROTATION SENSING Source 1 and Source 2 UNDER-VOLTAGE SENSING 3-phase normal, 3-phase emergency Accuracy: ±2 % of full-scale phase to phase Phase to neutral voltage range 50Vac to 414Vac. Phase to phase voltage range 86Vac to 717Vac. OVERVOLTAGE SENSING 3-phase normal, 3-phase emergency Accuracy: ±2 % of full-scale phase to phase Phase to neutral voltage range 52Vac to 416Vac. Phase to phase voltage range 90Vac to 720Vac. OVER/UNDER FREQUENCY SENSING Normal and emergency Accuracy: ±0.2 Hz Frequency range 3.5 – 75 Hz SYNC CHECK For in-phase transfer 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 220 of 234 POWERCOMMAND® 40-01 TRANSFER SWITCH CONTROL SPEC SHEET ENVIRONMENT Operating Temperature Range Control operates over an ambient temperature range: -30 ºC to 70 ºC. Storage Temperature Range The control operates after being exposed to Storage Temperatures in the range of -40 ºC to 85ºC. Ingress Protection The front panel is to be IP65. CODES AND STANDARDS The PC40-01 control is a UL Recognized Component Marked for United States and Canada. Capable of being used on systems compliant with NFPA 70, 99 and 110 (Level 1). The control is IEEE C37.90.2 certified. Capable of being used on IEEE 446 compliant systems; Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems. Control and display as installed in a transfer switch enclosure comply with NEMA 4X and IP65 at the transfer switch level - if the transfer switch enclosure is also NEMA 4X & IP65 compliant. RoHS The control is RoHS compliant.NEC® Capable of being used on systems suitable for use in emergency, legally required and Standby and Critical Operations Power Systems (COPS) applications per NEC 700, 701, 702 and 708. Fulfills the requirements of relevant European product directives.LVD The unit is designed to comply with European directive 72/23/EEC by complying with harmonized European safety standard BS EN 60950. EMC The control is tested to meet the following CE Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standards for EN 61000 series (electromagnetic compatibility): EN 61000-6-2 Generic Immunity Standard EN 61000-6-4 Generic Emissions For more information, please contact your local Cummins distributor or visit cummins.com Our energy working for you.™ All rights reserved. Cummins is a registered trademark of Cummins Inc. PowerCommand, AmpSentry, InPower and “Our energy working for you.” are trademarks of Cummins Inc. Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. Specifications are subject to change without notice. Cummins Inc. Box 3005 Columbus, IN 47202-3005 U.S.A. cummins.com Bulletin XXXXXXX Produced in U.S.A. Rev. 10/21 ©2021 Cummins Inc. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 221 of 234 Sheet 1 of 2 Part Name: 0310-1307 Revision: D Drawing Name: 0310-1307 Revision: D9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 222 of 234 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 223 of 234 Commercial generator set Extended warranty statement - Feature Code L189 A065P280 Rev. 2 August 2021 Models manufactured by the Cummins Custom Design and Upfit Center (CDUC) in De Pere, Wisconsin 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 224 of 234 PLEASE KEEP FOR YOUR RECORDS Generator Set model:_____________________________________________________________ Generator Set serial number or product identifier:_____________________________________ Generator Set data in-service: _____________________________________________________ NOTES: 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 225 of 234 A065P280 Rev. 2 August 20211 This extended limited warranty statement applies to the emergency standby ratings (only) of the following commercial generator set (GenSet) models: C175N6 C200N6 C250N6 C300N6 C350N6 C400N6 C450N6 C500N6 C500N6B C550N6 C600N6 C635N6 C650N6 C690N6 C750N6 C760N6 C815N6 C1000N6B C1300N6 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 226 of 234 A065P280 Rev. 2 August 20213 Cummins commercial GenSet extended limited warranty Feature code L189 “5 year or 2,500 hour Parts + Labor + Travel Extended Warranty” This extended limited warranty (Feature code L189 - “5 year or 2,500 hour Parts + Labor + Travel Extended Warranty”) applies to all Cummins Inc. branded commercial GenSet models identified herein and associated accessories (“Product”). This extended limited warranty covers any failures of the Product, under normal use and service, which result from a defect in material or factory workmanship. Extended limited warranty period The extended limited warranty start date is the date of initial startup, first rental, demonstration or 18 months after factory ship date, whichever is sooner. The extended limited warranty coverage duration is five years or 2500 hours, whichever occurs first. Cummins responsibilities In the event of a failure of the Product during the extended limited warranty period due to defects in material or workmanship, Cummins will be responsible for only the following: • All parts and labor required to repair the Product. • Reasonable travel expenses to and from the Product site location. • Maintenance items that are contaminated or damaged by a warrantable failure. Owner responsibilities The owner will be responsible for the following: • Notifying the Cummins distributor or dealer within 30 days of the discovery of failure. • Installing, operating, commissioning and maintaining the Product in accordance with Cummins’ published policies and guidelines. • Providing evidence for the date of commissioning. • Providing sufficient access to and reasonable ability to remove the Product from the installation in the event of a warrantable failure. • Incremental costs and expenses associated with Product removal and re-installation resulting from difficult or non-standard installations. • Costs associated with rental of a GenSet used to replace the Product being repaired. • Costs associated with labor overtime and premium shipping requested by the owner. • All downtime expenses, fines, applicable taxes, damages, and other losses resulting from a warrantable failure. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 227 of 234 A065P280 Rev. 2 August 2021 4 Extended limited warranty limitations This extended limited warranty does not cover Product failures resulting from: • Inappropriate use relative to designated power rating or application guidelines. • Inappropriate use of an EPA-SE application GenSet relative to EPA’s standards • Normal wear and tear or corrosion. • Negligence, accidents or misuse. • Improper and/or unauthorized installation. • Lack of maintenance or unauthorized repair. • Noncompliance with any Cummins manual, published guideline, or policy. • Use of improper or contaminated fuels, coolants or lubricants. • Improper storage before or after commissioning. • Owner's delay in making Product available after notification of potential Product problem. • Replacement parts and accessories not authorized by Cummins. • Use of Battle Short Mode. • Owner or operator abuse or neglect such as: operation without adequate coolant or lubricants; over- fueling; over-speeding; lack of maintenance to lubricating, cooling or air intake systems; delayed/late servicing and maintenance; improper storage, starting, warm-up, run-in or shutdown practices; or progressive damage resulting from a defective shutdown or warning device. • Damage to parts, fixtures, housings, attachments and accessory items that are not part of the GenSet. • Unusual or special operating environments. This extended limited warranty does not cover: • Costs of maintenance, adjustments, installation, commissioning or start-up. • Starting batteries, battery chargers, cooling packages, heating elements, exhaust system or after- treatment components, or trailers. (These components shall be covered by the respective manufac- turer's warranty, if applicable.) • Components added to the Product after shipment from Cummins. • Costs associated with gaining access to the Product. • Damage to customer property. • Repair of cosmetic damage to an enclosure after shipment from Cummins. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 228 of 234 Cummins Inc. Box 3005 Columbus, IN 47202-3005 U.S.A. 1-800-CUMMINS™ (1-800-286-6467) cummins.com Printed in U.S.A. ©2021 Cummins Inc. A065P280 Rev. 2 August 2021 5 Cummins right to failed components Failed components claimed under this extended limited warranty remain the property of Cummins. Cummins has the right to reclaim any failed component that has been replaced under this extended limited warranty. Limitation on warranties THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH HEREIN ARE THE SOLE WARRANTIES MADE BY CUMMINS IN REGARD TO THE PRODUCT. CUMMINS MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OR OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Limitation on liabilities IN NO EVENT SHALL CUMMINS BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. This extended limited warranty shall be enforced to the maximum extent permitted by applicable law. This extended limited warranty gives the owner specific rights that may vary from state to state or from jurisdiction to jurisdiction. Cummins contact information Any questions regarding this extended limited warranty statement may be directed to CSSNAPGWarranty@cummins.com. This product has been manufactured under the controls established by a Bureau Veritas Certification approved management system that conforms with ISO 9001:2015. 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 229 of 234 English Original Instructions A029Y876 (Issue 7)1-2021 Warranty Statement Transfer Switch 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 230 of 234 Effective Date: 01-Jan-2021 Page 1 of 2 A029Y876 Issue 7 Limited Warranty Transfer Switch This limited warranty applies to all Cummins, Inc. branded Transfer Switches and associated accessories (hereinafter referred to as "Product"). This warranty covers any failures of the Product, under normal use and service, which result from a defect in material or factory workmanship. Warranty Period: The warranty start date is the date of commissioning†, demonstration or 18 months after factory ship date, whichever is sooner. † Date of commissioning not to exceed date of Generator Set initial start-up. Transfer Switch Coverage Duration: The warranty coverage duration for Transfer Switches is defined in the table below for the different product families: Product Family Duration GTEC, OTEC, LTS (LighTS) 1 Year: Parts, Labor & Travel OTPC, BTPC, OHPC, CHPC, CXR, CXT, CXS Years 0-2: Parts, Labor & Travel Years 3-5: Parts Only Years 6-10: Main Contacts Only Cummins, Inc. Responsibilities: In the event of a failure of the Product during the warranty period due to defects in material or workmanship, Cummins, Inc. will only be responsible for the following costs: Parts and labor required to repair the Product as defined by coverage duration. Reasonable travel expenses to and from the Product site location as defined by coverage duration. Owner Responsibilities: The owner will be responsible for the following: Notifying Cummins, Inc. distributor or dealer within 30 days of the discovery of failure. Installing, operating, commissioning and maintaining the Product in accordance with Cummins, Inc.’s published policies and guidelines. Providing evidence for date of commissioning. Providing sufficient access to and reasonable ability to remove the Product from the installation in the event of a warrantable failure. In addition, the owner will be responsible for: Incremental costs and expenses associated with Product removal and reinstallation resulting from non-standard installations. Costs associated with rental of power generating equipment used to replace the Product being repaired. Costs associated with labor overtime and premium shipping requested by the owner. All downtime expenses, fines, all applicable taxes, and other losses resulting from a warrantable failure. Limitations: This limited warranty does not cover Product failures resulting from: Inappropriate use relative to designated power rating. Inappropriate use relative to application guidelines. Non-conformance to applicable industry standards for installation Normal wear and tear. Improper and/or unauthorized installation. Negligence, accidents or misuse. Lack of maintenance or unauthorized repair. Noncompliance with any Cummins, Inc. published guideline or policy. Improper storage before and after commissioning. Owner’s delay in making Product available after notification of potential Product problem. Replacement parts and accessories not authorized by Cummins, Inc. Owner or operator abuse or neglect such as: late servicing and maintenance and improper storage. Damage to parts, fixtures, housings, attachments and accessory items that are not part of the transfer switch or paralleling system. 5 year limited warranty specified 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 231 of 234 Effective Date: 01-Jan-2021 Page 2 of 2 A029Y876 Issue 7 This limited warranty does not cover costs resulting from: Difficulty in gaining access to the Product. Damage to customer property. Please contact your local Cummins, Inc. Distributor for clarification concerning these limitations. CUMMINS, INC. RIGHT TO FAILED COMPONENTS: Failed components claimed under warranty remain the property of Cummins, Inc. Cummins, Inc. has the right to reclaim any failed component that has been replaced under warranty. Extended Warranty: Cummins, Inc. offers several levels of Extended Warranty Coverage. Please contact your local Cummins, Inc. Distributor for details. www.power.cummins.com THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH HEREIN ARE THE SOLE WARRANTIES MADE BY CUMMINS, INC. IN REGARD TO THE PRODUCT. CUMMINS, INC. MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OR OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT IS CUMMINS, INC. LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. This limited warranty shall be enforced to the maximum extent permitted by applicable law. This limited warranty gives the owner specific rights that may vary from state to state or from jurisdiction to jurisdiction. Product Model Number:_______________________ Product Serial Number:________________________ Date in Service:______________________________ 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 232 of 234 REQUIREMENTS FOR GENERATOR STARTUP IMPORTANT MESSAGE: (This document must be completed, signed and returned prior to the scheduled startup) The following must be completed by the individual responsible for the installation of the Generator at the JobSite. All Systems must be installed in accordance with Cummins Power Generation published installation recommendations and Project Specific Drawings Diesel Generators There is sufficient fuel (winterized fuel if applicable) in the sub-base tank for start-up and testing. Note: The Owner/Contractor is responsible for supplying fuel: “#2 Diesel, low-sulfur/ultra-low sulfur" is required LPG or Natural Gas Generators Gas pressure meets Cummins specifications – please refer to the submittal documents for proper fuel pressure & volume The Gas Company has turned on the gas and there is fuel to the generator. If required by local authority , a signed Natural Gas/Propane/LPG Fuel System Certificate indicating compliance to all applicable authorities rules and regulations pertaining to the location of the equipment. General Requirements (check all that apply) Are the following correctly installed, mounted, wired, connected, wrapped, insulated, and operating (as applicable)? Exhaust system Engine Heater AC but not energized Room lighting Fuel solenoid valve, strainer and PRV Louver motors and cooling fans Exercise Clock ready to be programmed Transfer Switch(es) All Alarms Battery Charger connected to building AC power Carburetor Heater & Outlet DC control wiring & AC feeds in separate conduit between Genset & ATS Radiator Exhaust Ducting: Air In/Out Openings meet specs & are clear of debris All required inspections have been completed (EG: Local Authorities, Natural Gas, Plumbing, Electrical, etc.) All interconnect wiring between generator, transfer switch and remote annunciator Note: Service Technician will not pull wires or run conduit for the annunciator (if applicable) Miscellaneous 1) How close can our Technician get a vehicle and trailer to the generator for Load Bank testing?Ft/Yds 2) Does the Genset have a remote radiator? (if Yes, please attach details of location) 3) Is the Genset: 4) Is the Room/Site swept and free of all debris? 5) Will Contractor/Owner personnel be available for instruction? 6) Accessibility to elevators, if required? 7)Is equipment connected to normal utility power? 8)Can transfer switch be tested at time of generator startup? (Note: There will be a power interruption) Please note (1): Always refer to manuals shipped with the equipment for proper installation information. Please note (2): The Cummins Sales and Service Technician will supply lube, oil, anti-freeze and starting battery. Please note (3): Adjustments after the initial Start-Up are not included in the Start-Up and are not covered by Warranty. ***************************************************************************************************************************************** Please note (4): The Contractor/Owner understands that the above items must be completed prior to start up. Should additional trips be needed resulting from Contractor/Owner not completing the above requirements, or if our Service Technician assists in completing any of the tie-ins, the Contractor/Owner will be responsible for the additional labor and mileage incurred. Load Bank Tests will not be conducted during inclement weather. Additional trips will be at contractor/owners’ expense. ***************************************************************************************************************************************** Yes No on roof in the grounds of the propertyinsideoutside Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 233 of 234 REQUIREMENTS FOR TRANSFER SWITCH STARTUP IMPORTANT MESSAGE: The following must be completed by the individual responsible for the installation of the Transfer Switch at the JobSite. All Systems must be installed in accordance with Cummins Power Generation published installation recommendations and Project Specific Drawings General Requirements NOTE: Cummins service technician(s) will not be responsible for pulling or terminating wires. Please check all boxes to confirm complete: All switch(es) meet specs as requested and have been inspected prior to applying AC power. DC control wiring & AC feeds in separate conduit between Genset & ATS All switch(es) are clear of debris. All transfer switch alarms have been terminated as indicated. Battery Charger connected to building AC power All interconnect wiring between generator, transfer switch and remote annunciator are completed. Exercise Clock is ready to be programmed (if applicable) Miscellaneous 1) How close can our Technician get a vehicle and trailer to the ATS for testing/startup?Ft/Yds 2) ATS(s) location: 3) Will Contractor/Owner or necessary personnel be available for instruction? Please note (1): Always refer to manuals shipped with the equipment for proper installation information. Please note (2): Adjustments after the initial Start-Up are not included in the Start-Up and are not covered by Warranty. PSU‐002 ***************************************************************************************************************************************** Please note (3): The Contractor/Owner understands that the above items must be completed prior to start up. Should additional trips be needed resulting from Contractor/Owner not completing the above requirements, or if our Service Technician assists in completing any of the tie-ins, the Contractor/Owner will be responsible for the additional labor and mileage incurred. Load Bank Tests will not be conducted during inclement weather. Additional trips will be at contractor/owners’ expense. ***************************************************************************************************************************************** on roof inside outside Yes No below ground level 9913 Installation of Utility Service Center Generator Page 234 of 234